JP6051598B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. As these gaming machines, a configuration in which an effect is performed using an effect device is known.

  For example, a configuration in which a display effect is performed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. Further, for example, a configuration is known in which light is produced by a predetermined light emission pattern in a light emitting unit such as an LED. In addition, for example, a configuration is known in which an effect is produced by performing a predetermined operation using a movable object (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP2011-110091A

  Here, there is a demand for a configuration that can suitably perform the execution control of the effect, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing production execution control.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is characterized in that the first movable effect means that operates to be at the first operation position at least once for one execution of the operation times,
Second movable rendering means that operates to be in the second operation position at least once for one execution of the operation times;
First detecting means for detecting that the operating position of the first movable effect means becomes the first operating position;
Second detection means for detecting that the operation position of the second movable effect means is the second operation position;
First start control means for starting a first effect state in which the operation of the first movable effect means is performed and the operation of the second movable effect means is not performed ;
Second start control means for starting a second effect state in which an operation is performed in both the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means;
Stop information setting means for setting stop information;
After the stop information is set in the first effect state, when the first detection means detects that the operation position of the first movable effect means becomes the first operation position, the first moveability First stop control means for stopping the operation of the effect means ;
After the stop information is set in the second effect state, the first detection means detects that the operation position of the first movable effect means has become the first operation position, and the second move effect means Second stop control means for stopping the operation of the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means when the second detection means detects that the operation position is the second operation position;
With
The second stop control means is configured such that when the stop information is set, the operation position of the first movable effect means is within a first operation range including the first operation position, or the second move effect means. When the movement position is in the second movement range including the second movement position, the movement of both the first movable presentation means and the second movable presentation means is prevented from being stopped, and then the first movable movement means is performed. After the operating position of the rendering means is not in the first operating range but the operating position of the second movable rendering means is not in the second operating range, the operating position of the first movable rendering means is the first motion. When the first detection means detects that the position has been reached, and when the second detection means detects that the operation position of the second movable effect means has become the second operation position, 1st movable Stops the operation of means and the second movable representation section out,
The first stop control means is configured such that when the stop information is set, even if the operation position of the first movable effect means is within the first operation range, the operation position of the first movable effect means is the first position. When the first detecting means detects that the position is an operating position, the operation of the first movable effect means is stopped .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform production execution control.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is a schematic diagram of the game board for demonstrating a curtain plate movable unit and a disk movable unit. (A)-(e) It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of a curtain plate movable body. (A)-(e) It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of a disk movable object. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command corresponding | compatible process performed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed by display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process performed by display side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the data table for patterns which can be selected when it becomes a highly accurate hit result. It is a flowchart which shows the separate response | compatibility process performed with display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task process performed in display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command setting process performed in display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display side command corresponding | compatible process performed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the operation type | system | group corresponding | compatible process performed in the sound light side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the content of communication between the sound-light side MPU and display side MPU in case an operation effect is performed. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data group for light emission, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a light emission data area. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a pallet data group, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a starting position data group, (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a list data group, d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a group data group. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a data selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the reading process of the light emission data performed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the data expansion | deployment process performed in the sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of light emission data. It is a flowchart which shows the light emission control process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that light emission control is performed. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data group for sound output, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a sound output data area. It is a flowchart which shows the read-out process of the sound output data performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the sound output control process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the movable object effect performed by sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the movable object control process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st step control process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd step control processing performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pair waiting control process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd step control processing performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the return control processing performed in sound light side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that a 3rd step effect is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the single control process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that the disk production by single control is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the synchronous control process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment process for rotation stop performed with the sound-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a return performed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for rotation stop performed by the sound-light side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a problem when the adjustment process for rotation stop and the process accompanying it are not performed. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that the disk production by a synchronous control process is performed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation | movement content at the time of receiving the command of a stop command in a restriction | limiting range and a restriction | limiting range. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the sensor monitoring process performed in the sound-light side MPU in 2nd Embodiment, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a movable object data area. It is a flowchart which shows the synchronous control process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pair waiting control process performed in the sound light side MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a command response process. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command corresponding | compatible process performed in the sound light side MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the display side command corresponding | compatible process performed in the sound light side MPU.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. Although a detailed explanation by illustration is omitted, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame that is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 and a front portion of the inner frame that is rotatably supported by the inner frame. And a back pack unit disposed behind the inner frame and rotatably supported by the inner frame. In addition, the gaming machine body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The front door frame has a function to lock the inner door frame so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  A gaming board 20 shown in FIG. 2 is mounted on the gaming machine main body 12. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 20 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 20.

  The game board 20 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 21, a special electricity winning device 22, an upper operating port 23, a lower operating port 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, a special drawing display unit 33, a general drawing display unit 34, and the like. ing. When a ball entering the general winning port 21, the special electric winning device 22, the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 is generated, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 20, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In addition, an out port 27 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 20, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 27. In addition, the game board 20 is provided with a large number of nails 28 and various members such as a windmill in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls.

  Here, the entry means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the state of being discharged to the back side of the game board 20 when passing through the opening but also passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area continues to flow down without being discharged from the game area later is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 27, the general winning port 21, the special electric prize device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24, or the through gate 25 The entry of a game ball is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 20. Both the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 23 and 24 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 23 is on the upper side. The lower working port 24 is provided with a universal power 24a as a guide piece made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 24a, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 24, and the winning of the lower operating port 24 becomes possible when the electric utility item 24a is opened.

  The special electric prize winning device 22 includes an unillustrated large winning opening that leads to the back side of the game board 20 and an open / close door 22a that opens and closes the large winning opening. The open / close door 22a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open / close door 22a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is switched to an open state in which a game ball can win when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery. It has become. Incidentally, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted when a jackpot result is obtained. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state.

  The special figure display part 33 and the common figure display part 34 are provided on the lower side of the game area. In the special figure display unit 33, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 as a trigger, and the winning of the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is performed as a result of stopping the variation display. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the above is clearly displayed. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 23 and the winning to the lower working port 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and are performed based on the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24. The result of the internal lottery is displayed in the special figure display section 33 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a special stop result is displayed on the special figure display unit 33. Is displayed and the variable display is stopped, and then the mode is changed to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The special figure display unit 33 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. A liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , CRT, dot matrix, and other types of display devices. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the special figure display unit 33, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the general map display unit 34, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning to the through gate 25 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 25 is displayed as a stop result of the variation display. Specified by. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 25 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the open state of the electric train, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the general map display unit 34 and the change display is displayed. After being stopped, it will transition to the open state. In the general electric open state, the general electric utility 24a provided in the lower working port 24 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 that variably displays a symbol which is a kind of a symbol. The variable display unit 26 is provided with a center frame 32 so as to surround the symbol display device 31. The center frame 32 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display surface G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. ing. In addition, the center frame 32 is provided with a stage portion 32a at the lower portion thereof where the game ball can roll in the lateral direction. The game ball that has entered the entrance portion formed on the left side of the center frame 32 is supplied to the stage portion 32a by passing through the lead-out passage formed on the left side. Then, the game ball that falls downward from the position near the center in the stage portion 32a is likely to win the upper working port 23.

  The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  In the symbol display device 31, the variation display of the symbol is started based on the winning in the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24. That is, when the variable display is performed in the special figure display unit 33, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 31 accordingly. For example, in the game times in which the game result is a jackpot result, the symbol display device 31 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on a preset active line.

  The display content of the symbol display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display surface G of the symbol display device 31.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 (a) to 3 (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display surface G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, on the display surface G, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is like that. Further, as shown in FIG. 4A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5 are set on the display surface G. . Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the variation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the jackpot result.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variable display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-described pattern. For example, only a numeral may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  Also, based on the winning of any one of the operation ports 23, 24, the special display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 start the variable display until the predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped. Corresponds to one game time.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 2, a special figure holding light emitting unit 35 corresponding to the special figure display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display unit 33. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed when the special figure holding light emitting unit 35 is turned on. Further, at a position adjacent to the universal map display unit 34, a universal map holding light emitting unit 36 corresponding to the universal map display unit 34 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 25 is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the general-purpose holding light emitting unit 36. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the function of each holding | maintenance light emission parts 35 and 36 is fulfill | performed by the display in the one part area | region of the symbol display apparatus 31. FIG.

  Here, in addition to the symbol display device 31, the variable display unit 26 includes a curtain plate movable unit 51 and a pair of left and right disk movable units as a plurality of output devices used for performing effects and notifications. 61a and 61b, the 1st light emission part group 71, the 2nd light emission part group 72, and the 3rd light emission part group 73 are provided. The curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable units 61a and 61b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the game board 20 for explaining the curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable units 61a and 61b.

  The curtain plate movable unit 51 is arranged in front of the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, covers a part of the display surface G from the front, and is provided so that the covered region is variable. And a plurality of curtain plate drive units 53a, 53b for displacing the curtain plate movable object 52. The curtain plate movable object 52 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged such that its longitudinal direction is the horizontal direction.

  A left curtain plate drive unit 53a is provided as a part of a plurality of curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b at a position closer to the left end than the central position in the longitudinal direction of the movable curtain plate 52. In addition, a right curtain plate drive unit 53b is provided as a remainder of the plurality of curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b at a position closer to the right end than the central position in the longitudinal direction in the movable curtain plate 52. Yes. That is, a pair of left and right curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b is provided as the plurality of curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b.

  The left curtain plate drive unit 53a and the right curtain plate drive unit 53b have the same configuration. Specifically, each curtain plate drive unit 53a, 53b includes curtain plate rails 54a, 54b extending in the vertical direction. The curtains 54a and 54b are provided at a position above the upper edge of the exposed opening 32b that exposes the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 in the center frame 32. Curtain plate rails 54 a and 54 b are set to have a vertical dimension larger than the vertical dimension of curtain plate movable object 52, and the entirety thereof exists on the back surface of center frame 32. That is, the curtain plate rails 54a and 54b are provided so as not to protrude toward the exposed opening 32b.

  Slide members 55a and 55b are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the curtain rails 54a and 54b. The slide members 55a and 55b are slidable in the vertical direction along the corresponding curtain rails 54a and 54b. Each of the slide members 55a and 55b is integrated with the movable curtain plate 52 via a connecting portion (not shown). In this case, the left slide member 55a is integrated with a region closer to the left end than the center position in the longitudinal direction of the curtain plate movable object 52, and the right slide member 55b is integrated with the curtain plate movable object 52. Are integrated with the region closer to the right end than the center position in the longitudinal direction. The slide members 55a and 55b are fixed so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the curtain plate movable object 52. As the slide members 55a and 55b slide on the corresponding curtain plate rails 54a and 54b, the movable curtain plate 52 integrated with the slide members 55a and 55b is displaced in the vertical direction.

  There is a predetermined play at the connecting portion between the curtain plate movable object 52 and each of the slide members 55a and 55b, and the curtain plate movable object 52 in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction with the front-rear direction as the rotation axis. Displacement is allowed. As a result, the height position of one of the slide members 55a and 55b can be made different from the other within the range until the tilt angle of the movable curtain plate 52 reaches a predetermined angle.

  Each slide member 55a, 55b is provided with a pinion gear (not shown), and each curtain plate rail 54a, 54b is provided with a rack (not shown). Each slide member 55a, 55b is provided with curtain plate driving portions 56a, 56b for rotating the pinion gear. When the left curtain plate driving portion 56a is in a driving state, the left slide member 55a is displaced in the vertical direction, and the left area of the curtain plate movable object 52 can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the right area. When the curtain plate driving portion 56b is in a driving state, the right slide member 55b is displaced in the vertical direction, and the right area of the movable curtain plate 52 can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the left area. Further, since both the left curtain plate drive unit 56a and the right curtain plate drive unit 56b are in the drive state, the left and right slide members 55a and 55b are both displaced in the vertical direction, and the entire curtain plate movable object 52 is moved. Is displaced in the vertical direction.

  When the slide members 55a and 55b are present on the curtain plate rails 54a and 54b on the side farthest from the exposure opening 32b, that is, at the upper ends of the curtain plate rails 54a and 54b. Most of the movable curtain plate 52 is hidden behind the center frame 32, and only a small area is located in the exposure opening 32b. This position is the initial position of the curtain plate movable object 52, and in the situation where the effect using the curtain plate movable object 52 is not performed, the curtain plate movable object 52 is disposed at the initial position.

  When the curtain plate movable object 52 is disposed at the initial position, the curtain plate drive parts 56a and 56b are driven, so that the curtain plate movable object 52 moves toward the center of the exposure opening 32b. . This displacement is performed with the position where each slide member 55a, 55b reaches the end of the curtain rails 54a, 54b close to the exposed opening 32b, that is, the lower end of the curtain rails 54a, 54b as the limit position. Is called. When the curtain plate movable object 52 is lowered, the area exposed from the exposure opening 32b in the curtain plate movable object 52 is widened.

  In a configuration in which the curtain plate movable object 52 can be displaced between the initial position and the limit position, curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b are provided for detecting that the curtain plate movable object 52 is disposed at the initial position. It has been. The curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the slide members 55a and 55b. As the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b, optical sensors are used, but the type of sensor such as a switch type sensor or an electromagnetic type sensor is arbitrary.

  In addition to the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b, adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are provided as sensors for detecting the position of the curtain plate movable object 52. The adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the slide members 55a and 55b. More specifically, the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b detect the presence of the slide members 55a and 55b at predetermined positions that are closer to the limit position than the initial position. Is provided so as to detect the presence of the slide members 55a and 55b at the intermediate position. Note that optical sensors are used as the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, but the type of sensor such as a switch sensor or an electromagnetic sensor is arbitrary.

  The operation pattern of the movable curtain plate 52 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that a dot hatch is attached to a portion of the movable curtain 52 that is exposed to the front side of the game board 26 through the exposed opening 32b.

  First, the first stage operation will be described. In the first stage operation, as shown in FIG. 6A, in the situation where the curtain plate movable object 52 is disposed at the initial position, the drive for each curtain plate is performed so that both the slide members 55a and 55b descend together. When the portions 56a and 56b are in the driving state, the entire curtain plate movable object 52 is displaced downward (for example, the state shown in FIG. 6D). The downward displacement is stopped when both slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the corresponding adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. In the case of a curtain effect in which only the first stage operation is performed, the return operation is performed after the stopped state is maintained for a predetermined period.

  In the returning operation, the curtain plate driving parts 56a and 56b are simultaneously driven in the opposite directions, so that the curtain plate movable object 52 is raised while maintaining the horizontal state. This rise is stopped when both slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the corresponding curtain initial position sensors 57a and 57b, and the return to the initial position is completed.

  Next, a description will be given of a second-stage operation that is continuously executed without returning to the initial position after the first-stage operation. After the first stage operation, the curtain plate driving units 56a and 56b are in the drive state so that the vertical positions of the slide members 55a and 55b are relatively changed, so that FIG. 6B and FIG. As shown in FIG. 6 (c), the curtain plate movable object 52 alternately repeats a state of being inclined downward to the left and a state of being inclined downward to the right while being mostly exposed through the exposure opening 32b. The operation of repeating the alternately inclined state is the second stage operation. As a result, as the operation mode of the curtain plate movable object 52, there are not only a mode of lowering but also a mode of tilting to the left and right, thereby diversifying the mode of operation.

  Thereafter, a pair waiting operation is performed. In the pair waiting operation, as shown in FIG. 6 (d), the curtain plate driving units 56a and 56b are moved until the slide members 55a and 55b are respectively detected by the corresponding adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. Driven. Thus, the movable curtain plate 52 is in a horizontal state at a position slightly returned to the initial position side. When only the first stage operation and the second stage operation are performed, the return operation is performed after the pair waiting operation is performed, whereby the curtain plate movable object 52 is returned to the initial position. Become.

  Next, a description will be given of a third stage operation that is executed continuously without returning to the initial position after the second stage operation and the pair waiting operation. As shown in FIG. 6E, the third stage operation is such that after the pair waiting operation, the curtain plate driving portions 56a and 56b are driven so that the slide members 55a and 55b are lowered together. In addition, the curtain plate movable object 52 is an operation in which the whole is displaced downward while maintaining a horizontal state. Thereafter, the return operation is performed, whereby the curtain plate movable object 52 returns to the initial position.

As described above, there are a plurality of types of curtain panel effects using the curtain movable object 52. Specifically,
・ First stage action → First stage production that becomes return action,
-1st stage operation-> 2nd stage operation-> pair waiting operation-> 2nd stage production which becomes return operation,
-1st stage operation-> 2nd stage operation-> Pair waiting operation-> 3rd stage operation-> 3rd stage production which becomes return operation,
Is present.

  These multiple types of effects are generated as effects during game play, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot result in each case is different. Specifically, the third stage effect occurs in game times where the expectation of the jackpot result is higher than the first stage effect and the second stage effect, and the second stage effect is the expectation degree of the jackpot result than the first stage effect. Occurs at high game times.

  Next, the disk movable units 61a and 61b will be described with reference to FIG. 5 again.

  The disc movable units 61a and 61b are a pair of discs that are arranged in front of the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 so as to cover a part of the display surface G from the front and to change the covered region. Animals 62a and 62b and a pair of disk drive units 63a and 63b for displacing the respective disk movable objects 62a and 62b are provided. Each disk movable object 62a, 62b has the same configuration, and has a circular shape when viewed from the front. Moreover, the same decoration is given to the front of each disc movable thing 62a, 62b. The decoration has a shape having anisotropy that does not overlap between the case where the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are arranged at a predetermined rotation position and the case where the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are arranged at a specific rotation position different from that. Yes. More specifically, the decoration has a shape with anisotropy that does not overlap between any rotational positions of the movable discs 62a and 62b.

  In addition, the decoration of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b may be configured to have anisotropy that does not overlap between some predetermined rotational positions. Moreover, the outer edge shape of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b may be a shape having anisotropy that does not overlap between some predetermined rotational positions, and an anisotropic that does not overlap between any rotational positions. It may be made into a shape having the property. In the case of a shape having anisotropy as described above, a decoration having no anisotropy, that is, a decoration that overlaps between any rotation positions may be provided, and between some predetermined rotation positions. A configuration with an anisotropy that does not overlap may be applied, or a configuration with an anisotropy that does not overlap at any rotation position may be applied.

  Each disk movable object 62a, 62b is driven by the corresponding disk drive unit 63a, 63b to rotate and slide. The pair of disk drive units 63a and 63b have the same configuration. Specifically, each disk drive unit 63a, 63b is a disk rail 64a, 64b that extends obliquely from the outside of each corner below the exposed opening 32b toward the center of the exposed opening 32b. It has. The disc rails 64a and 64b are provided so as to extend in and out of the exposed opening 32b with reference to the peripheral edge of the exposed opening 32b. The disc rails 64 a and 64 b are set to have a length dimension larger than the diameter of the disc movable objects 62 a and 62 b, and a part of the disc rails 64 a and 62 b exists on the back surface of the center frame 32.

  Shaft guide members 65a and 65b are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the disk rails 64a and 64b. Each of the shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b is slidable in an oblique direction along the corresponding disk rails 64a and 64b, and the rotary base, which is a part of the member, can be moved back and forth at an arbitrary slide position. Can be rotated about the rotation axis. The shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b are integrated with the respective disk movable objects 62a and 62b through the rotation shafts inserted into the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b. Each of the shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b is provided on the back surface of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b, and is entirely covered from the front by the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. When the guide members 65a and 65b with shafts slide on the corresponding disc rails 64a and 64b, the movable discs 62a and 62b integrated with the guide members 65a and 65b with shafts are displaced obliquely. When the rotary bases of the shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b rotate, the movable discs 62a and 62b integrated with the shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b rotate.

  Each of the disk rails 64a and 64b is provided with a driving roller (not shown), a driven roller, and a conveyor belt that is driven by these rollers, and the guide members 65a and 65b with shafts are connected to each other to engage with the conveyor belt (not shown). Is provided. Each of the disk rails 64a and 64b is provided with disk slide drive parts 66a and 66b for driving the drive roller to rotate. When the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b are in the drive state, the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b are displaced in an oblique direction. Each of the shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b is provided with disk rotation driving portions 67a and 67b (not shown) for rotating the rotary base. When the disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b are in a driving state, the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b rotate.

  When the guide members with shafts 65a and 65b are present in the vicinity of the center in the longitudinal direction on the disk rails 64a and 64b, part of the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b is hidden behind the center frame 32, and Only the region of the portion is the position where it exists in the exposed opening 32b. This position is an initial position in the sliding direction of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. Further, in the situation where the effect using the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is not performed, the disk movable object 62a so that a predetermined portion of the decoration attached to the surface of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is a predetermined rotation position. , 62b is determined. This position is the initial position in the rotational direction of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. The initial position in the sliding direction and the initial position in the rotational direction is the initial position of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b.

  When the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are placed in the initial positions, the corresponding disk slide driving parts 66a and 66b are in the driven state, so that the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are directed toward the center of the exposed opening 32b. Move. The displacement is determined by taking the position at which the shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b reach the end near the center of the exposed opening 32b in the disk rails 64a and 64b, that is, the upper end of the disk rails 64a and 64b as the limit position. Done. In the state of being arranged at this limit position, the entire disk movable objects 62a and 62b are exposed through the exposure opening 32b. Further, the disk rotation driving parts 67a and 67b are in a driving state at an arbitrary position in the sliding direction, whereby the disk movable objects 62a and 62b rotate. The rotating operation can be performed even while the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are sliding.

  Slide for detecting that the movable discs 62a and 62b are arranged at the initial position in the sliding direction in the configuration in which the movable discs 62a and 62b can slide between the initial position and the limit position in the sliding direction. Initial position sensors 68a and 68b are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the movable discs 62a and 62b. The slide initial position sensors 68 a and 68 b are provided on the back surface of the center frame 32. Note that optical sensors are used as the initial slide position sensors 68a and 68b, but the type of sensor such as a switch sensor or an electromagnetic sensor is arbitrary.

  In the configuration in which the movable discs 62a and 62b are rotatable and the initial position in the rotational direction exists as the rotational position of the movable discs 62a and 62b, the movable discs 62a and 62b are arranged at the initial positions in the rotational direction. Rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b for detecting the movement are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. The rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are provided on the corresponding shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b, and are provided so as not to follow the rotation of the rotary base and the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. As the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, optical sensors are used, but the type of sensor such as a switch type sensor or an electromagnetic sensor is arbitrary.

  The operation of the movable discs 62a and 62b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, in the situation where the disc movable objects 62a and 62b are arranged at the initial positions, the disc slide driving units 66a and 66b are in the drive state, so that the disc movable objects 62a and 62b are driven. The sliding movement of the respective disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped by sliding in the oblique direction and reaching the limit position as shown in FIG. 7B. In this case, the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b are driven so that the slide movements of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are synchronized. Further, while the slide movement is being performed, the disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b are maintained in the non-driven state, and therefore the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are not rotated.

  Whether or not the limit position has been reached is determined by setting the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b in a driving state so as to have a predetermined slide speed. This is performed based on the measurement result of the continuous period in which the driving state is set. However, it is not limited to the said structure, For example, the sensor for detecting that the limit position is reached in the position corresponding to the said limit position in the disk rails 64a and 64b is provided, and the detection result of the said sensor Thus, it may be configured to determine whether or not the limit position has been reached.

  Thereafter, when the disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b are driven, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b start to rotate in a predetermined direction as shown in FIG. 7C. In this case, the initial position in the rotation direction of each disk movable object 62a, 62b is set so that the decoration attached to the front of each disk movable object 62a, 62b is in the same mode. The decorative aspects of the movable discs 62a and 62b are the same. Each of the movable discs 62a and 62b starts rotating at the same start timing, and rotates in the same direction at the same rotational speed. Therefore, each disk movable object 62a, 62b rotates in a state synchronized with each other.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of the movable discs 62a and 62b may be configured to rotate in opposite directions to each other, and is basically configured to rotate in the same direction. In order to notify that the expectation level to be high or the jackpot result is during the game round, it may be exceptionally configured to rotate so as to be opposite to each other.

  Thereafter, each disk slide drive unit 66a, 66b is driven in the reverse direction, whereby each disk movable object 62a, 62b starts sliding movement toward the initial position in the slide direction, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the initial position in the sliding direction is finally returned. In this case, since the drive state of the disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b is maintained even while the slide movement toward the initial position is performed, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b slide and move while rotating. It will be. These slide movements and rotations are also performed in synchronization with each other between the movable discs 62a and 62b. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 7 (e), the rotational position of the movable discs 62a and 62b is stopped by the rotational position of the movable discs 62a and 62b becoming the initial position in the rotational direction.

  In addition, the effect using the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is used as an effect indicating that the degree of expectation of the jackpot result is medium or higher. For example, when the degree of expectation is medium, the slide operation and the rotation operation as shown in FIGS. 7A to 7E are performed on only one of the pair of movable discs 62a and 62b. When the degree is high, the slide operation and the rotation operation as shown in FIGS. 7A to 7E are performed while both the pair of disk movable objects 62a and 62b are synchronized. Further, when the disk movable objects 62a and 62b return to the initial positions, there may occur a situation in which the rotation operation is stopped prior to the slide movement, and the slide movement and the rotation operation are stopped simultaneously or substantially simultaneously. A situation can arise.

  Next, the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 are all provided in the center frame 32. Each light emission part group 71-73 is provided with several LED71a, 72a, 73a as a some light-emitting body, respectively. These LEDs 71a to 73a are of a multi-color emission type and can emit at least white, blue, red, green, and yellow light. Each light emission part group 71-73 is arranged so that a plurality of LEDs 71a-73a may become a plurality of columns and a plurality of rows. In this case, when the light emitting units 71 to 73 are irradiated with light of different colors between different columns or different rows, the LEDs 71a to 73a can be recognized so that the player can recognize the color difference. The position and light intensity are set. In addition, although the number of LED differs between each light emission part groups 71-73, and also the aspect of arrangement | sequence is also different, the number or arrangement | sequence aspect of LED is the same among some light emission part groups 71-73. It is good also as a structure which is the same, and it is good also as a structure where the number or arrangement | sequence aspect of LED is the same among all the light emission part groups 71-73.

  Each of the LEDs 71a to 73a of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is provided so as to be covered from the front by the light transmitting portions 74, 75, and 76 formed in the center frame 32 so as to be translucent white. Of each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the first light emitting unit group 71 is provided on the left side above the exposed opening 32b, and the second light emitting unit group 72 is above the exposed opening 32b. The third light emitting unit group 73 is provided at a position on the right side of the exposure opening 32b.

  The lighting of the light in each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is used as an effect and is also used as a state notification of the pachinko machine 10. These contents will be described later in detail.

  Returning to the description of the game board 20, a rail part 37 is attached to the game board 20, and a guide rail is constituted by the rail part 37, and a game ball launched on the inner frame below the game board 20 is launched. A game ball launched from a mechanism (not shown) is guided to the upper part of the game area. In the gaming ball launching mechanism, a launching operation of a gaming ball is performed by operating a launching handle 41 provided on the front surface of the gaming machine body 12.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a window portion 42 is formed on the front portion of the gaming machine main body 12 so that almost the entire gaming area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 43 (not shown) is fitted therein. Although the window panel 43 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, it is not limited to this and may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin.

  A light emitting means is provided around the window portion 42. A display light-emitting part 44 is provided above the window part 42 as a part of the light-emitting means. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 44, speaker units 45 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided.

  Below the window part 42 in the front part of the gaming machine main body 12, an upper bulging part 46 and a lower bulging part 47 that bulge to the near side are arranged vertically. An upper pan 46 a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower pan 47 a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 47a has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 46a. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 are discharged to the upper plate 46a and the lower plate 47a.

  In an area facing the front of the pachinko machine 10 in the upper bulging portion 46, an effect operating device 48 having an operation portion that is manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is manually operated by the player so that the effect content on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 is the predetermined effect content.

  On the back side of the gaming machine main body 12, a main control device, a sound emission control device, a display control device, a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, and a power supply / launch control device are mounted. Yes. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 90 includes a main control board 91 that controls the main game and a power failure monitoring board 95 that monitors the power source. The main control device 90 may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of opening to the board box that accommodates the main control board 91 or the like. . As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer that remains on an adhesion target at the time of peeling is peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of what has been done is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 90.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 95 and a payout control device 101 provided in the main control device 90 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. The power failure monitoring board 95 is connected to a power source / launch control device 102 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 92 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board 95.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Each of the various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e has a one-to-one detection with respect to a winning-corresponding pitched portion such as a general winning port 21, a special electric winning device 22, an upper operating port 23, a lower operating port 24, and a through gate 25. A sensor is included, and the MPU 92 makes a winning determination for each winning part. Further, in the MPU 92, various lotteries are executed based on winnings in the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24.

  On the output side of the MPU 92, a power failure monitoring board 95, a payout control device 101, and a sound emission control device 103 are connected. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control apparatus 101 based on a winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning part. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 103. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 92, a special electric drive unit 22b for opening and closing the open / close door 22a of the special electric prize winning device 22, and a general electric drive unit 24b for opening and closing the electric utility item 24a of the lower operating port 24, A special map display unit 33 and a general map display unit 34 are connected. Although not shown in FIG. 8, a special figure holding light emitting unit 35 and a universal figure holding light emitting unit 36 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The main control board 91 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 92 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  In other words, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 performs drive control of the special electric drive unit 22b so that the special electric prize winning device 22 is opened and closed. In addition, when the power utility item 24a is elected in the open state, the MPU 92 executes drive control of the power generator 24b so that the power utility item 24a is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the special figure display unit 33 is executed in the MPU 92. Further, in the case where the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the general electric utility 24a is clearly indicated, the display control of the general map display unit 34 is executed in the MPU 92. In addition, when winning is awarded to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 33, the display control of the special figure holding light emitting unit 35 is executed in the MPU 92, When a winning to the through gate 25 occurs, or when a variable display is started in the general map display unit 34, the display control of the general map hold light emitting unit 36 is executed in the MPU 92.

  The power failure monitoring board 95 relays between the main control board 91 and the power / fire control device 102, and monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control device 102. The payout control device 101 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 104 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 90.

  The power source / launch control device 102 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like, for example. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 91 and the payout control device 101 and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply / launch control device 102 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor. Even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, the power supply unit for power interruption The storage holding power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the control device 90. The power supply / launch control device 102 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 105, and the game ball launch mechanism 105 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound light emission control device 103 includes a sound light emission control board 111 on which the MPU 112 is mounted. The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 112 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 113 is executed. A RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

  Based on the command received from the main control device 90, the MPU 112 determines the contents of effects to be executed in the game times, the opening / closing execution mode, and the like. And while performing the light emission control of the 1st light emission part group 71, the 2nd light emission part group 72, and the 3rd light emission part group 73 which were provided in the game board 20 so that the operation | movement corresponding to the determined content may be performed, Sound output control of the speaker unit 45 provided on the front surface of the gaming machine main body 12 is performed. The MPU 112 is electrically connected to the curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b of the curtain plate movable unit 51, and is electrically connected to the disk drive units 63a and 63b of the disk movable units 61a and 61b. Therefore, the curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b and the disk drive units 63a and 63b are driven and controlled so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. Further, the MPU 112 performs light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 provided on the front surface of the gaming machine main body 12. In addition, an effect operating device 48 is electrically connected to the input side of the MPU 112, and the MPU 112 monitors the presence / absence of operation of the effect operating device 48, and when the effect operating device 48 is operated, A process for reflecting the operation on the progress of the performance is executed. Furthermore, the MPU 112 identifies whether or not notification is necessary based on the command received from the main controller 90, and performs light emission control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and sound output control of the speaker unit 45. This is notified.

  The MPU 112 is electrically connected to the display control device 120. The MPU 112 transmits to the display control device 120 a command including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 90 and a notification including the content of the notification corresponding to the command received from the main control device 90. The display control device 120 is not configured to receive a command from the main control device 90 without going through the sound emission control device 103, and communicates with the main control device 90 more than the sound emission control device 103. It can be said that it exists downstream in the direction.

  The display control device 120 includes a display control board 121 on which an MPU 122 that is an element in which a program ROM 123 and a work RAM 124 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 125, a character ROM 126, and a video RAM 127 are mounted. It has.

  The MPU 122 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 103 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 125 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 125).

  The program ROM 123 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 122 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply when holding the stored information. The work RAM 124 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 122, and a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is.

  The VDP 125 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP 125 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 125 can be said to be a microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 125 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 122, the video RAM 127, etc., and intervenes in reading and writing data, and reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 127 from the character ROM 126 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 31.

  The character ROM 126 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 31. The character ROM 126 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  The video RAM 127 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 31, and the display contents of the symbol display device 31 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 127.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 112, the ROM 113, and the RAM 114 of the sound emission control device 103 are referred to as the sound light side MPU 112, the sound light side ROM 113, and the sound light side RAM 114, respectively. The work RAM 124 is referred to as a display side MPU 122, a display side ROM 123, and a display side RAM 124, respectively.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, commands are exchanged between the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 by bidirectional communication.

  That is, the sound emission control device 103 and the display control device 120 are electrically connected using the first signal line group 131, and display is performed from the sound light side MPU 112 using the first signal line group 131. A command is transmitted to the side MPU 122. Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the first signal line group 131 includes a signal line 132 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, data of 1 bit) included in the command data. A signal line 133 for identifying a clock signal, and a signal line 134 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of transmission start and transmission end of one command. Note that a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

  Further, the sound emission control device 103 and the display control device 120 are electrically connected using a second signal line group 141, and sound light is emitted from the display side MPU 122 using the second signal line group 141. A command is transmitted to the side MPU 112. Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the second signal line group 141 includes a serial command data transmission signal line 142 and each unit data (for example, 1-bit data) included in the command data. A signal line 143 for identifying a clock signal, and a signal line 144 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of transmission start and transmission end of one command. Note that a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

  The first signal line group 131 and the second signal line group 141 are provided as one connection unit. The connection unit includes a connector in which one ends of the first signal line group 131 and the second signal line group 141 are aggregated, and a connector in which the other end is aggregated, and one connector emits sound. The connector of the control device 103 is detachably attached, and the other connector is detachably attached to the connector of the display control device 120.

  The communication method between the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 is not limited to serial communication, and may be parallel communication. Alternatively, the first signal line group 131 and the second signal line group 141 may be provided as separate connection units.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 92 of the main controller 90>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 92 of the main controller 90 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 92 uses lots of counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the special symbol display unit 33, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 31, setting of display of the general symbol display unit 34, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, when the winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, and the symbol display device 31 are changed. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and variation type for determining the display duration in the special figure display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 The counter CS is used. Furthermore, the utility power release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the utility power 24a of the lower operation port 24 is set to the utility power open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the big hitting type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is reserved storage provided as an acquisition information storage means in the RAM 94 when a winning to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 occurs. Stored in area 94a.

  The holding storage area 94a includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. The combination of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 are stored on hold.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 33, and starting one game round At this time, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general electric utility release counter C4 will be described. For example, the utility power release counter C4 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The general electric utility release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the general electric power holding area 94c of the RAM 94 at a timing when a game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the universal utility 24a to the open state based on the stored value of the universal utility release counter C4.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric utility 24 a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when the game ball is continuously fired in the same manner with respect to the game area, the utility object 24a of the lower working port 24 is released per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high and low.

  In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the open state of the electric utility item using the electric utility item release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5). However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric utility 24a is opened when the public power open state is selected is set more than in the low frequency support mode. It is set long. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state of the electric power utility is selected and the open state of the general electric utility 24a occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, a minimum secured time (the minimum secured time for the next public power utility opening lottery after the first public power utility opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode ( That is, the display duration time for one time in the normal map display unit 34 is set short.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the lower working port 24 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be generated in the upper operating port 23 than in the lower operating port 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 24 is connected to the lower operating port 24. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is awarded to the lower operating port 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode becomes open to the public power per unit time than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the general electric utility is open. It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming a public power open state win in lottery. In addition, a secured time (for example, a general map display unit 34 based on a winning to the through gate 25) is secured after the next public utility product opening lottery is performed. In the configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, in the high frequency support mode, it is easier to select a short securing time or the average securing time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. It may be set. Furthermore, increase the number of times of opening, lengthen the opening time, and shorten the secured time that is secured after the next public power utility release lottery is performed. The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode is increased by applying any one condition or any combination of the conditions for shortening the average time of the reserved time and increasing the winning probability. Also good.

  For example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 94a at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24.

  The random number value for winning the jackpot is stored in the ROM 93 as a success / failure table. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are set. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 94 a at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 93 as a distribution table. In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability big hit result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the high probability big hit result. ing.

  The low probability big hit result is a big hit result that the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, the high-frequency support mode ends when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift, and shifts to the low-frequency support mode. Further, the high-probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  The opening / closing execution mode is a mode in which a round game is played 15 times. A round game is a game that continues until either a predetermined upper limit duration has elapsed and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win a special electric prize winning device 22 is satisfied. That is. The upper limit duration is set to 29 sec, and the upper limit number is set to nine. In each round game, the special electricity prize winning device 22 is opened only once, but the opening may be performed a plurality of times.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 41 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 105 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 seconds. . Then, in each round game, an upper limit duration time that is longer than the product of the launch period of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game is set. Therefore, in each round game, it can be expected that the special electricity prize winning device 22 will receive the maximum number of prizes in one round game.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 31. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 31 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is a given correspondence result in a game round that is a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 31 This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to be the above-mentioned giving correspondence result at the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started. In addition, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the result of giving correspondence at a stage before the reach display occurs are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, and the remaining combinations are displayed in that state. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is displayed in the symbol row is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen, and the reach effect is performed. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface G after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  In the notice display, in the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 is started, or in some symbol columns. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the aspect until then, and what makes the symbol on the symbol row | line | column Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also contained. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped. Further, in the game times corresponding to the result of losing, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 93 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. To be executed.

  On the other hand, whether or not to perform the notice display is determined not by the main controller 90 but by the sound emission controller 103. In this case, in the sound emission control device 103, the game times corresponding to any one of the jackpot results are more likely to generate a notice display than the game times corresponding to the miss result, and a notice display with a low appearance rate is displayed. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being easily generated. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 31.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 92 determines the display duration time in the special symbol display unit 33 and the symbol display duration time in the symbol display device 31. The value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the special symbol display unit 33 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 31.

<Various types of processing executed by the MPU 92 of the main controller 90>
Next, each process performed in order to advance a game in MPU92 of the main controller 90 is demonstrated. The processing of the MPU 92 is roughly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is activated. In the subsequent step S102, access to the RAM 94 is permitted, and the internal function register of the MPU 92 is set in step S103.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power / fire control device 102 is manually operated. In subsequent step S105, whether or not the power failure flag of the RAM 94 is set to “1” is determined. Determine whether. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In subsequent step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 94 is cleared as initialization of the RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is executed without executing step S108 on condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 94 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103 in order to recognize the current gaming state. To do. In addition, a payout initialization command indicating that the RAM of the payout control apparatus 101 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control apparatus 101.

  Then, it progresses to the residual process of step S110-step S113. That is, the MPU 92 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and a change counter update process for updating the change type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical value information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 94, and the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is performed. If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the MPU 92 will be described. The main control board 91 is provided with a clock circuit as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and further, a frequency dividing circuit so as to exist in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the MPU 92. Is provided.

  The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing unit that changes the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the MPU 92. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 92 at intervals of a 4 msec period which is a specific period. The MPU 92 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rise or fall of the pulse signal, and starts and executes the timer interrupt process with at least one condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed. To do.

  In this case, when the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the start of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed when the interrupt is permitted from the state where the interrupt is prohibited. Interrupt processing is started. In other words, depending on the execution status of the process in the MPU 92, there is a case where the next timer interrupt process is started after 4.1 msec from the start of the previous timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is started after 3.9 msec from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt process.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle of 4 msec regardless of the progress of the processing in the MPU 92, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the MPU 92 is such that even if the timer interrupt process at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific period since the previous timer interrupt process was started, the timing next to the predetermined timing In the timer interrupt processing at, the portion exceeding the specific period is absorbed, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board. If the occurrence of a power outage is specified, the process during power outage is executed.

  In subsequent step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal utility release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility release counter C4, and a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed. Later, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112. In a succeeding step S205, a game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped. If the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped.

  Specifically, a radio wave detection sensor, a magnet detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor are provided on the front side of the gaming machine main body 12. The MPU 92 determines whether or not unauthorized radio waves are output to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the radio wave detection sensor, and the magnet is attached to the game board 20 based on the detection result of the magnet detection sensor. It is determined whether or not an action of approaching is performed, and it is determined whether or not unauthorized vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the vibration detection sensor. If an affirmative determination is made in any of these determinations, it is determined that a specific event corresponding to an illegal act on the pachinko machine 10 has occurred, and execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped.

  Thereafter, in step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped. If the progress of the game is stopped, in step S207, the notification command output process is executed, and then the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the process for outputting the notification command, if any specific event has occurred and the notification command has not yet been output in response to the occurrence of the specific event, the notification command is sent to the sound emission control device 103. Output. Since the notification command includes the content of the specific event that triggered the output, the sound emission control apparatus 103 performs notification execution setting corresponding to the content of the specific event.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S206 that the progress of the game is not stopped, the processing after step S208 is executed. In step S208, a cancel command output process is executed. Release command output processing is performed when the state where the specific event that triggered the notification command output has already been released and the release command has not yet been output for the release. The command is output to the sound emission control device 103. Since the release command includes the content of the specific event to be released that triggered the output, the sound emission control device 103 performs notification cancellation setting corresponding to the specific event.

  In the subsequent step S209, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 22b and 24b is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special electric prize winning device 22 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 22b is started, and when the information to be switched to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information for switching the power utility 24a of the lower working port 24 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 24b for the general power is started and the information to be switched to the closed state. Is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In the subsequent step S210, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In subsequent step S211, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from the winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are read and the general winning port 21, the special electric winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24 and the through gate 25 are entered. Execute the process to identify the presence or absence.

  In the subsequent step S212, timer update processing for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 94 is executed. In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  In the subsequent step S213, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In a situation where the launch operation is continued for the launch handle 41, one game ball is launched at a predetermined launch period of 0.6 sec.

  In the subsequent step S214, as input state monitoring processing, disconnection confirmation of the winning detection sensors 96a to 96e and release confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 are performed based on the information read in the reading processing in step S210. In this case, in the input state monitoring process, when it is confirmed that the gaming machine main body 12 is released, a notification command output process is executed as in step S207. In the notification command output process, a notification command indicating that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state and a notification command indicating that a disconnection has occurred in each of the winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are transmitted. Further, in the input state monitoring process, based on the signal received from the payout control device 101, it is determined whether or not the lower plate 47a is full, and whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 104. If such a determination is made and an affirmative determination is made in these determinations, a corresponding notification command is transmitted.

  In the subsequent step S215, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later in detail.

  In the following step S216, the ordinary power control process is executed. In the ordinary map electric power control process, when winning through the through gate 25 occurs, a process for acquiring numerical information of the universal electric utility release counter C4 is executed and the numerical information is stored. In such a case, the numerical value information is determined to be released, and further, a process for performing an effect for ordinary drawing is executed in response to the opening determination. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process for opening and closing the utility tool 24a of the lower working port 24 is executed.

  In the subsequent step S217, the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 33 is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S215 and S216, and the display content of the general map display unit 34 is updated. Set the output information for

  In subsequent step S218, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control apparatus 101 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S219, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed. In subsequent step S220, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal in accordance with the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process (step S215).

  In the special figure special power control process, first, a hold information acquisition process is executed in step S301. In the hold information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated for the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24. If a winning has occurred, the number of holds in the holding storage area 94a is the upper limit value ( In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is less than “4”). When the number of reserves is less than the upper limit value, 1 is added to the number of holds, and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S202 is used for holding. Stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE.

  In addition, when winning to the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 occurs at the same time, the process for obtaining the hold information is performed a plurality of times within a range in which the hold information obtaining process is executed once. Run.

  After executing the hold information acquisition process in step S301, the process proceeds to step S302. In step S302, a process for reading information on a special figure special power counter provided in the RAM 94 is executed, and in step S303, a process for reading a special figure special electric address table from the ROM 93 is executed. In step S304, a process of acquiring a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special power counter from the special figure special electric address table is executed.

  Here, the processing content of step S302-step S304 is demonstrated.

  As already described, the special figure special electric control process includes a process related to the effect for game times and a process related to the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as processing related to the effect for game times, special figure variation start processing (step S306) that is processing for starting the effect for game times and processing for advancing the effect for game times. A special figure changing process (step S307) and a special figure determining process (step S308) which is a process for ending the effect for the game round are set.

  In addition, as processing related to the opening / closing execution mode, a special electricity start process (step S309) which is a process for controlling the opening of the opening / closing execution mode, and a special electricity release which is a process for controlling the open state of the special electricity prize winning device 22 Middle processing (step 310), special power closing processing (step S311) that is processing for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 22, the opening / closing execution mode ending and the gaming state at the end of the opening / closing execution mode A special electricity termination process (step S312), which is a process for controlling the transition, is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special power counter is a counter for the MPU 92 to grasp which of the above-mentioned types of processing should be executed. Corresponding to the numerical information of the special electric counter, the start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plural types of processing is set.

  In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process (step S306), and the start address SA1 is the program address for executing the special figure variation process (step S307). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure finalizing process (step S308), and the start address SA3 is the program address for executing the special electricity start process (step S309). The start address SA4 is a start address of a program for executing the special power open process (step S310), and the start address SA5 is a program for executing the special power close process (step S311). This is the start address, and the start address SA6 A start address of a program for executing (step S312).

  The special figure special electric power counter is the special figure special electric power control in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. Corresponding to the processing executed in the processing, 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared (initialized). Therefore, in the special figure special power control process at each processing time, a process corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter may be executed.

  After executing the process of step S304, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is executed in step S305. Specifically, if the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure change start process in step S306. In the special figure change start process, various determination processes are executed on the condition that the hold information is held and stored, and the game display in which the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 31 and the special figure display unit 33 is started. Execute the process. Details thereof will be described later.

  If the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure changing process of step S307. In the special figure changing process, a process for determining whether or not it is during the game continuation display time and before the final stop display is performed. Processing for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern is executed.

  By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until the final stop display timing is reached, if it is not the final stop display timing, after executing the above-described regular change processing, The process during change is terminated. Therefore, after the game-turn effect is started, the special-figure changing process is started every time the special-figure special-electric control process is started until the final stop display timing comes. In addition, when it is time to display the final stop, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the special figure finalizing process. Update to a compatible one.

  If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure determining process in step S308. In the special figure determination process, the final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103 in order to cause the symbol display device 31 to display the stop result of the current game round as a final stop display. The display mode is a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game time. In the special figure determination process, it is determined whether or not the period during which the final stop is displayed has elapsed. If the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs. If the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the mode transition processing is executed.

  Incidentally, instead of waiting in the special figure finalizing process until the final stop display period elapses, the special figure finalizing process is terminated when the period has not elapsed. Therefore, after the final stop display is started, the special figure determination process is started each time the special figure special electric control process is started until the period of the final stop display elapses. In addition, when the period during which the final stop is displayed has elapsed, the numerical information of the special figure special counter is initialized (that is, “0” is cleared) in the situation where the transition to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur, and the switching to the opening / closing execution mode is performed. In the situation where the transition occurs, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 to update the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special figure determination process to the one corresponding to the special electric power start process.

  If the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electricity start process in step S309. In the special electricity start process, an opening command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103. In the special electricity start process, it is determined whether or not the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. When the opening period has not elapsed, this special power start process is terminated instead of waiting in the special power start process. Therefore, after the opening effect in the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special power start process is started each time the special figure special power control process is started until the opening period elapses. In addition, when the opening period has elapsed, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special power start process to the one corresponding to the special power open process. .

  If the acquired start address is SA4, the process jumps to the special power release releasing process in step S310. In the special electric release opening process, one round game is started, and it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is satisfied. At the start of one round game, the special prize winning device 22 is set to an open state and an open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103. If the end condition of the round game is not satisfied, the process is not waited for in the special power release process, but the special power release process is terminated after executing the process for monitoring the completion of the end condition. When the above termination condition is satisfied, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special electric power open process to the one corresponding to the special electric power closed process. Update.

  If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the special electricity closing process in step S311. In the special electricity closing process, a process of ending one round game is executed. In this case, the special electric prize winning device 22 is closed and a closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103. Further, in the interval period between round games, it is determined whether or not the interval period has elapsed. When the interval period has not elapsed, this special electric power closing process is terminated instead of waiting in the special electric power closing process. Therefore, when the interval period is started, the special power closing process is started each time the special figure special electric control process is started until the period elapses. In addition, when the interval period has elapsed, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric current closing process to the one corresponding to the special electric current opening process. To do.

  On the other hand, in the special power shut-off process for the last round game, after executing the process of ending one round game, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 so that the numerical information of the counter is changed to the special power shut-off process. Update from the corresponding one to the one corresponding to the special electricity termination processing.

  If the acquired start address is SA6, the process jumps to the special power end process in step S312. In the special electric power end process, an ending command indicating that the open / close execution mode is ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103. In the special electric power end process, it is determined whether or not the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. If the ending period has not elapsed, the special electric power end processing is terminated instead of waiting in the special electric power end processing. Therefore, after the ending effect in the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special electric power end process is started every time the special figure special electric control process is started until the ending period elapses. In addition, when the ending period has elapsed, after executing processing for setting the gaming state (open / close lottery mode and support mode) after the opening / closing execution mode, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is initialized. The numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric power end process to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing special figure variation start processing (step S306).

  In the special figure variation start process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the number of holds N is 1 or more. If the number of holds N is “0”, the special figure variation start process is terminated as it is. If the number N of holds is 1 or more, a data setting process is executed in step S402.

  In the data setting process, first, the hold number N is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3. At this time, a shift command for causing the voice light emission control apparatus 103 to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted may be set as an output target and transmitted.

  In a succeeding step S403, an appropriateness determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table provided in the ROM 93, information for success / failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the numerical value obtained from the hit random number counter C1. It is determined whether or not the information matches the high probability jackpot information. In the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information obtained from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the low probability mode success / failure table provided in the ROM 93, and the low probability jackpot. It is determined whether or not it matches the numerical information.

  In a succeeding step S404, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in the step S403 is a jackpot winning result. If the result is a big win, the distribution determination process is executed in step S405. In the allocation determination process, information for allocation determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the distribution table provided in the ROM 93, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information of the grasped jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the low probability jackpot result or the high probability jackpot result.

  In the subsequent step S406, a stop result setting process for the big hit result is executed. Specifically, the information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 33 in the game round related to the start of the change is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the ROM 93 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 94. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 33 is set differently for each type of the jackpot result.

  In subsequent step S407, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed. Specifically, the RAM 94 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and in step S407, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, it corresponds to the distribution determination result in step S405. “1” is set for the flag.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S404 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed in step S408. Specifically, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 33 in the game times corresponding to the start of the current fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the detachment result stored in the ROM 93 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 94. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After executing one of the processes of step S407 and step S408, a display duration time grasping process is executed in step S409. In such processing, numerical value information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Further, it is determined whether or not a reach display is generated in the symbol display device 31 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times corresponding to the start of the current variation is a high probability big hit result or a low probability big hit result, it is determined that reach display occurs. If the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is not the result of any jackpot, but is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that reach display occurs, display duration information corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation display duration table stored in the ROM 93. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display duration information corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the ROM 93. get. Incidentally, the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach occurrence display duration table.

  Note that the display duration information when no reach occurs is set so that the display duration is shorter as the number N of holds is larger. In the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach mode is selected so that a shorter display duration is selected compared to the case where the number of the hold information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. The generation display duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display duration may not be changed according to the number of holds N and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above-described configuration may be applied to the display continuation time when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of various jackpot results, a display duration table may be individually set for each of the case of outreach and the case of a non-reach outbreak result. In this case, the display duration time is allocated according to each game result.

  In subsequent step S410, the display duration information acquired in step S409 is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed by the timer update process (FIG. 11) already described. By the way, as the effects for the game times, the symbol variation display on the special symbol display unit 33 and the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 31 are performed. When these variation displays are ended, the game times are displayed. In the state in which the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 31, a predetermined symbol combination is on standby on the active line), the final stop is displayed for the final stop time. In this case, the display continuation time acquired in step S409 is a time obtained by subtracting the final stop time from the total time for one game. In this respect, the display continuation time can be rephrased as the time before the final stop.

  In subsequent step S411, the change command and the type command are set as output targets. The change command includes display duration information. Here, the display duration obtained by referring to the display non-occurrence display duration table as described above is different from the display duration obtained by referring to the display occurrence time table for reach occurrence. Even if the information on the presence or absence of the reach is not included in the command for use, the sound emission control device 103 which is the sub-side control device can specify the presence or absence of the reach from the information on the display duration. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command includes game result information. The variation command and the type command set as output targets in step S411 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 103 which is a sub-side control device.

  After performing the process of step S411, the display of the variation of the pattern in the special figure display part 33 is started in step S412. In the subsequent step S413, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter. In this case, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”. Therefore, when the process of step S413 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “1”. " Thereafter, the special figure variation start process is terminated.

<Execution control of production and notification>
Next, production control and notification execution control using various output devices executed by the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 will be described.

  As already described, in the pachinko machine 10, commands are exchanged between the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 by bidirectional communication. And by exchanging commands by bidirectional communication, in the sound light side MPU 112, light emission control of various light emitting units including the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73, Sound output control of the speaker unit 45 and drive control of various movable objects including the curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable units 61a and 61b are executed, and the display control of the symbol display device 31 is executed in the display side MPU 122. . Hereinafter, specific processing contents for executing these various controls will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec) by the sound light side MPU 112.

  In the timer interruption process, first, in step S501, a main-side command storage process is executed. The main-side command storage process is a process for storing a command in the sound-side RAM 114 when a command is received from the MPU 92 of the main control device 90 (hereinafter referred to as the main-side MPU 92). The sound side RAM 114 is provided with a main ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 92. The commands received from the main MPU 92 are sequentially stored in the main ring buffer. The data is sequentially read according to the stored order.

  In a succeeding step S502, display side command storage processing is executed. The display side command storage process is a process for storing the command in the sound side RAM 114 when a command is received from the display side MPU 122. The sound light side RAM 114 is provided with a display side ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the display side MPU 122. The commands received from the display side MPU 122 are sequentially stored in the display side ring buffer. The data is sequentially read according to the stored order.

  Thereafter, in step S503, a main-side command corresponding process for executing a process corresponding to the command received from the main-side MPU 92 is executed, and in step S504, a process corresponding to the command received from the display-side MPU 122 is executed. The display side command corresponding process is executed, and in step S505, the light emission control process for performing the light emission control of the various light emitting units including the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 is performed. In step S506, a sound output control process for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 45 is executed. In step S507, various movable objects including the curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable units 61a and 61b. The movable object control process for performing the drive control is executed. The processing contents of steps S503 to S507 will be described later in detail.

  Thereafter, in step S508, it is determined whether or not the operation of the effect operation device 48 is valid. In the present pachinko machine 10, in a situation where a unit of effect is executed at a predetermined start timing, such as a game turn effect, when the effect operating device 48 is operated, a period in which the effect progresses according to the content. Can occur. On the other hand, even if the production operation device 48 is operated outside the valid period, the operation does not affect the progress of the production, and the operation itself is invalidated. In step S508, it is determined whether the valid period is in effect.

  If a negative determination is made in step S508, the timer interruption process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S508, it is determined whether or not the effect operating device 48 is operated in step S509.

  Here, the production operation device 48 outputs a LOW level operation signal when the operation unit is not operated, and outputs a HI level operation signal when the operation unit is operated. In the sound light side MPU 112, when the operation operating period of the effect operating device 48 is reached, the port portion to which data corresponding to the level of the signal received from the effect operating device 48 is written is periodically (for example, a cycle of 4 msec). When monitoring is started and the monitoring processing times for confirming the state of receiving the HI level signal following the monitoring processing times for confirming the state of receiving the LOW level signal are continued a plurality of times (for example, twice). In step S509, it is determined that the effect operating device 48 has been operated.

  Note that the HI / LOW relationship of the operation signal may be reversed, and the operation of the rendering operation device 48 is terminated instead of determining whether or not there is an operation on the side where the operation of the rendering operation device 48 is started. It is good also as a structure which judges the presence or absence of operation by the side.

  If a negative determination is made in step S509, the timer interruption process is terminated as it is. If the effect operating device 48 is operated, an operation occurrence command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 122 in step S510. This timer interrupt process ends. The operation generation command is a command for causing the display side MPU 122 to recognize that the production operation device 48 has been operated during the effective period of the operation of the production operation device 48. The effect of sending the command will be described later.

<Main-side command response processing of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
Next, the main-side command response process executed in step S503 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 92 or not. If these commands are received, game result storage processing is executed in step S602. Specifically, from the information included in the type command, information on which is the result of the lottery determination or distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 92 at the start of the current game round, that is, the current game Identifies information as to whether the game result of the game is a highly probable hit result, a low probable hit result, or a missed result, and executes a process of writing the specified information to the holding data area 161 provided in the sound side RAM 114 To do. The holding data area 161 is data temporarily used to execute the effects during the game rotation and the opening / closing execution mode, and notification, and the sound side MPU 112 even after the effects and notifications are started. This is an area for storing and holding data that can be used independently in the.

  In the subsequent step S603, a notice lottery process is executed. In the notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to make a notice display on the symbol display device 31 in the current game round. As the notice display, as described above, in the situation where the symbol display is variably displayed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started in the symbol display device 31, or in a part of In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol sequences, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and a background screen as a previous mode Includes a different predetermined mode, and a pattern on the symbol row Z1 to Z3 having a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. The notice display may occur at any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. In addition, in the notice lottery process, the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results are more likely to generate a notice display and more likely to generate a notice display having a lower appearance rate than the game times corresponding to the missed result. A lottery will be conducted.

  In the subsequent step S604, stop symbol determination processing is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a highly probable result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one active line L1 to L5 is displayed as the stop result of this time. It is determined as information. In this case, the same symbol type and valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, odd symbols are easily selected as symbols forming the same symbol combination. Also, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a low probability winning result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same even symbol combination is established on one active line L1 to L5, It is determined as information on the result of this stop. In this case, the same symbol type and valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Also, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a missed result, the presence or absence of reach display is specified from the contents of the change command. And when reach display occurs, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the reach symbol combination is established on one or two effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the stop result to be determined is determined as information on the current stop result. On the other hand, when reach display does not occur, this is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the reach symbol combination is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the result is determined as information on the current stop result.

  In the subsequent step S605, processing for determining the effect pattern of the current game time is executed. In this process, the information on the display duration of the game times is specified from the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time, the information on the display duration, the information on the game result specified in step S602, And the production | generation pattern corresponding to the combination of the information of the lottery result of the notice lottery process in the said step S603 is selected.

  In subsequent step S606, a process of writing each information of the type of effect pattern selected in step S605 and the type of stop symbol determined in step S604 to the holding data area 161 of the sound side RAM 114 is executed. Since the production pattern includes information on the display duration of the current game time, writing the production pattern information in the holding data area 161 allows not only the production pattern information but also the display duration information. The sound light side MPU 112 can read again. However, the sound light side MPU 112 does not measure the display duration time.

  In subsequent step S607, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result in step S604 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result in step S605 are transmitted to the display-side MPU 122. The processing contents of the display side MPU 122 upon receiving these commands will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S608, a game number updating process is executed. In the update process, a process for updating the game number counter is executed such that 1 is added to the number of digested games measured in the game number counter provided in the holding data area 161 of the sound side RAM 114. The number of times of digestion game is the number of game times that have been digested without re-entering the opening / closing execution mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. The sound side MPU 112 can use the information on the number of digestion games when determining the contents of the production. For example, if the number of digestion games is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a predetermined notice display is selected in the notice lottery process. Processes that make it easier.

  If a negative determination is made in step S601, or after the processing in step S608 is executed, it is determined in step S609 whether a final stop command has been received. If the final stop command has been received, the symbol stop command is transmitted to the display side MPU 122 in step S610. The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display side MPU 122 to wait for the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round on the active lines L1 to L5 and maintain the state for the final stop time.

  If a negative determination is made in step S609, or after the processing of step S610 has been executed, it is determined in step S611 whether an opening command has been received. If the opening command has been received, update processing of the number of opening / closing execution modes is executed in step S612. In the update process, the open / close execution mode count counter is updated so that the open / close execution mode count measured in the open / close execution mode count counter provided in the holding data area 161 of the sound side RAM 114 is incremented by one. Execute the process. The number of opening / closing execution modes refers to the number of opening / closing execution modes that occurred in a situation where the transition from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode does not occur. The sound light side MPU 112 can use the information on the number of times of opening / closing execution mode when determining the contents of the effect. For example, if the number of times of opening / closing execution mode is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, An effect corresponding to that is executed.

  In the subsequent step S613, an opening handling process is executed. In the opening handling process, the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode included in the opening command received this time is specified, and the production contents in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type of jackpot result are determined. Execute the process for In this case, the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode of this time is a highly probable jackpot result, and the same even symbol is used instead of the same odd symbol combination in the symbol display device 31 in the immediately preceding game round. When the combination of is displayed as a final stop, an effect that includes content for allowing the player to recognize that the success / failure lottery mode has been promoted from the low probability mode to the high probability mode is displayed in the current opening / closing execution mode. Determine as.

  As already described herein, the retained data area 161 of the sound side RAM 114 stores information on the game result and information on the type of the game stop symbol on the symbol display device 31 regarding the effect for the game turn. When the opening / closing execution mode is entered after the execution of the game times, the game result information and the stop symbol type information stored in the holding data area 161 are cleared when the opening / closing execution mode ends. The Therefore, even if the opening command does not include information on the display content of the symbol display device 31 in the immediately preceding game round, it is possible to execute the effect including the promotion content in the opening / closing execution mode as described above. .

  Also, in the opening handling process in step S613, the number of opening / closing execution modes after the update in step S612 is specified, and an effect corresponding to the specified number of opening / closing execution modes is set as an effect in the current opening / closing execution mode.

  In the following step S614, an opening command corresponding to the processing result in step S613 is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. The processing contents of the display side MPU 122 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S611, or after the process of step S614 is executed, it is determined in step S615 whether an open command has been received. If the release command has been received, in step S616, the display-side MPU 122 recognizes that the opening of the special electricity prize winning device 22 has been newly started, that is, that one round game has been newly started. The release command is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. The processing contents of the display side MPU 122 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S615, or after the process of step S616 is executed, it is determined in step S617 whether a close command has been received. If the close command has been received, in step S618, the display side MPU 122 is notified to the display side MPU 122 in order to make the display side MPU 122 recognize that the special electric prize winning device 22 has been closed, that is, that one round game has ended. Send a close command. The processing contents of the display side MPU 122 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S617, or after the processing in step S618 is executed, it is determined in step S619 whether an ending command has been received. If an ending command has been received, an ending handling process is executed in step S620. In the ending handling process, the content of the lottery mode after the open / close execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the process for determining the content of the ending effect corresponding to the type of the lottery mode is executed. To do. In this case, when the high probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode, the effect including the content for allowing the player to recognize that the high probability mode is set is determined as the ending effect of this time, and after the opening / closing execution mode. In the case of the low probability mode, the effect including the content for allowing the player to recognize that the low probability mode is set is determined as the current ending effect.

  In the subsequent step S621, an ending command corresponding to the processing result in step S620 is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. The processing contents of the display side MPU 122 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S619, or after the process of step S621 is executed, it is determined in step S622 whether a notification command is received. When the notification command is received, it means that an event that should be notified, such as some abnormality or a state change of the pachinko machine 10, has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and in order to perform the notification, In S623, the light emission data reading process is executed, and in step S624, the sound output data reading process is executed. The contents of each reading process will be described later. Thereafter, in step S625, a notification command corresponding to the content of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. The processing contents of the display side MPU 122 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S622, or after the processing of step S625 is executed, it is determined in step S626 whether a release command has been received. If the cancel command has been received, this means that an event to be notified such as an abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 has been cancelled, and therefore, in order to cancel the notification that has already been performed, step S627 is performed. To execute the release setting process. Specific contents of the cancellation setting process will be described later. Thereafter, in step S628, a release command corresponding to the content of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. The processing contents of the display side MPU 122 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S626, or after executing the process of step S628, the other corresponding process is executed in step S629, and then the corresponding process is terminated. In other processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a demo start command is received. If the demo start command is received, the demo start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 122.

  Demo display means that a predetermined start waiting period for demo start (for example, 0.1 sec) has passed without the start of a new game round after the end of the game round in a situation that is not in the open / close execution mode. In this case, or after the power supply to the main MPU 92 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a start waiting period for starting a demonstration (for example, 3 sec. ) Starts in the symbol display device 31. In the demonstration display, an image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are performing a predetermined operation is displayed. However, the display is not limited to this. For example, the symbols perform a predetermined operation. It may be configured such that a maker name, a model name, or a moving image with a predetermined character is displayed after or instead of displaying a displayed image. Further, in the configuration in which the demonstration display is performed by the animation of the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the immediately preceding game round may be used as the symbol. In this case, the demonstration display can be diversified.

<V interrupt processing of display side MPU 122>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the display side MPU 122 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle, specifically, 20 msec.

  When the image signal for one frame is output to the symbol display device 31, the VDP 125 starts outputting the image signal from the dot at the upper left corner of the display surface G, and on the horizontal line including the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output for the arranged dots, and image signals are output from the left to the right dots in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, an image signal is finally output for the dots in the lower right corner of the display surface G. In this case, the VDP 125 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display-side MPU 122 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, so that the display-side MPU 122 recognizes that the update of one frame image has been completed. The output period of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this regard, the V interrupt processing can be regarded as being started in synchronization with reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, the V interrupt process is newly started when 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started.

  In the V interrupt processing, first, in step S701, command analysis processing is executed. Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the display side RAM 124 are analyzed. In a succeeding step S702, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received based on the analysis result in the step S701. If a new command has been received, command response processing is executed in step S703.

  In the command handling process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, it is first determined in step S801 whether a stop result command and a pattern command have been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the stop result command and the pattern command is read from the display-side ROM 123 and written to the display-side RAM 124 in step S802, and then this command is supported. The process ends.

  The pattern data table is necessary to display an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the current game effect on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31. This is a group of information for which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, an information group corresponding to each frame (frame update cycle is 20 msec) from the start timing to the end timing in the current game round effect is defined.

  The pattern data table will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is an example of a pattern data table that can be selected when a highly accurate winning result is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the pattern data table, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the display duration time of the target game times is set. Corresponding to each pointer information, the contents of the task are set. Information, command output presence / absence information, and additional data information are set.

  The task content information is information set to display a video corresponding to the current game round, and unless information that does not reflect the task content information is set as additional data, In the frame, an image corresponding to information on the contents of the task is displayed. Information on the contents of the task includes information on parameters necessary for instructing the VDP 125 to perform a drawing instruction in order to display an image for one frame at the corresponding update timing.

  Specifically, with respect to the pattern data table shown in FIG. 18, data at the start of variation is set in the pointer information “0”, and data at the start of the notice effect is set in the pointer information “200”. , “300” pointer information is set to the end of the notice effect, “400” pointer information is set to the normal reach start data, and “700” pointer information is set to the super reach start time. The data at the start of the definite effect is set in the pointer information “1000”, and the data at the end of the variation is set in the pointer information “1400”. Each piece of the pointer information corresponds to a delimiter timing such as the start of the effect, the change of the effect, and the end of the effect. Further, in the pointer information other than these, data for enabling the moving image display between the break timings is set.

  The information on the presence / absence of command output is information indicating the presence / absence of a command output from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112 and the type of the command. The display-side MPU 122 outputs a command to the sound-light-side MPU 112 at a predetermined timing according to the content of the moving image, so that the first light-emitting unit group 71, the second light-emitting unit group 72, the third light-emitting unit group 73, and the like emit light. It is possible to execute the effect of light according to the contents of the image at the section, to allow the speaker section 45 to execute the effect of sound output according to the contents of the image, and further, the curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable unit 61a. , 61b and the like can be performed according to the content of the image.

  For the pattern data table shown in FIG. 18, specifically, command data is set for pointer information of “0” in which data at the start of variation is set in the task contents. Therefore, at the start of the change of game times, light emission control and sound output control are started in the sound light side MPU 112 based on command transmission from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112. In addition, in the contents of the task, from the pointer information in which each of the data at the start of the notice effect, the data at the start of normal reach, the data at the start of super reach, the data at the start of the final effect and the data at the end of the variation is set Also, the pointer information at the timing before the number of frames (the number of pointers) for pre-transmission, specifically, the pointer information of “198”, “398”, “698”, “998”, “1398” Command data is set. Therefore, command transmission from the display-side MPU 122 to the sound light-side MPU 112 is performed in advance for the break timings other than the start of the game time fluctuation, and the display contents of the symbol display device 31 and the light emission control are performed at these break timings. It is possible to completely synchronize the sound output control and the contents of the drive control of the movable object.

  The information of the additional data is set as a blank as the initial setting of the pattern data table, and the writing process to the additional data is executed when a notification execution instruction is given. When the additional data is written, the information written in the additional data has priority over the information originally set in the task content. For example, when additional data corresponding to displaying a predetermined character as an image is set as a notification, the image display is performed so that the character image is added on the image corresponding to the content of the task. Made.

  If a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S803 whether a final stop command has been received. If the final stop command has been received, after executing the final stop setting process in step S804, the command response process ends. In the final stop setting process, a process of reading a data table for stationary display corresponding to the current game round from the display ROM 123 and writing it to the display RAM 124 until the last stop display period has elapsed. Run.

  If a negative determination is made in step S803, it is determined in step S805 whether an opening command has been received. If an opening command has been received, in step S806, an opening data table corresponding to the opening command is read from the display-side ROM 123 and written in the display-side RAM 124, and then the command-corresponding process ends.

  The opening data table is to display an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect for the current opening / closing execution mode on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31. This is a group of information in which processing necessary for is defined. The data structure of the opening data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table. In other words, in the opening data table, not only the information group in which processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing of the image is defined, but also the sound corresponding to the delimiter timing of the production. Data for transmitting commands to the optical side MPU 112 is set.

  However, in the opening data table, the contents of effects during each round game and during the interval period between round games are determined from the start of the opening effect. In this case, the data in the round game is set so that the image of the loop or the last update timing is held until the corresponding round game is finished, and similarly, the data in the interval ends the corresponding interval. It is set so that the image of the loop or the last update timing is held until. The range of pointer information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched in response to reception of an open command or a close command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S805, it is determined in step S807 whether either an open command or a close command has been received. If any command has been received, the setting process at the time of opening and closing is executed in step S808, and then the command handling process is terminated. In the opening / closing setting process, the range of pointer information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the contents of the received command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S807, it is determined in step S809 whether an ending command has been received. If the ending command has been received, in step S810, the ending data table corresponding to the ending command is read from the display ROM 123 and written in the display RAM 124, and then the command handling process is terminated.

  The ending data table is necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each image update timing when displaying a moving image corresponding to the current ending effect on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31. This is a group of information for which various processes are defined. The data structure of the ending data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table. In other words, in the ending data table, not only the information group in which processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing of the image is defined, but also the sound corresponding to the delimiter timing of the production. Data for transmitting commands to the optical side MPU 112 is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S809, this command response processing ends after another response processing is executed in step S811.

  In the separate handling process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, it is first determined in step S901 whether a notification command has been received. If the notification command has been received, in step S902, the notification data setting processing is executed, and then the individual response processing ends. In the notification data setting process, notification data corresponding to the notification content included in the current notification command is written as additional data (see FIG. 18) of the currently set data table. Thereby, when the image is updated next time, the content of the notification data is reflected, and for example, a character image corresponding to the type of event to be notified is added to the effect image for game times and the effect image for the opening / closing execution mode. .

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined in step S903 whether a release command has been received. If a release command has been received, after performing a notification data clear process in step S904, the corresponding process is terminated. In the notification data clear process, the notification corresponding to the type of notification target event set as the notification release target in the release command received this time among the notification data set in the additional data of the data table at present Execute the process to clear the data. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the notification of the type that is the cancellation target is canceled.

  If a negative determination is made in step S903, it is determined in step S905 whether an operation generation command has been received. As described above, the operation generation command is a command transmitted from the sound light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122 when the effect operation device 48 is operated during the effective period of the operation of the effect operation device 48. If an operation generation command has been received, in step S906, by referring to the currently set data table, the timing at which the operation generation command is received is the rendering operation set in the data table. It is determined whether or not the operation of the device 48 is valid. If a negative determination is made in step S906, the main handling process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S906, the operation presence flag provided in the display-side RAM 124 is set to “ After “1” is set, the individual handling process is terminated. The operation presence flag is a flag for specifying on the display side MPU 122 whether or not the effect operation device 48 is operated during the effective period of the operation of the effect operation device 48.

  If a negative determination is made in step S905, it is determined in step S908 whether an execution permission command has been received. The execution permission command is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122 in order to permit execution of the effect corresponding to the operation when the effect operation device 48 is operated during the effective period of the operation of the effect operation device 48. Sent. If an execution permission command has been received, in step S909, operation effect data corresponding to the content of the current operation effect is written as additional data (see FIG. 18) of the currently set data table. Thus, the operation effect is started after the next image update timing.

  In the data table for the game times or opening / closing execution mode in which an effect according to the operation of the effect operation device 48 can be executed, data of contents when the effect operation device 48 is not operated is set as the task content. ing. Therefore, when the production operation device 48 is not operated during the effective period, the display control is performed according to the contents of the task as it is, and the production at the time of non-operation is performed. Further, the content of the operation effect is specifically arbitrary. For example, a configuration in which at least one of an effect image, a character, and a moving image that does not appear in the non-operation effect is displayed.

  After performing the process of step S909, after setting "1" to the operation effect flag provided in the display side RAM 124 in step S910, the corresponding process is terminated. The operation effect flag is a flag for specifying on the display side MPU 122 whether or not the operation effect should be performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S908, other corresponding processing is executed in step S911, and then the main corresponding processing is terminated. In other handling processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a demo start command has been received. If a demo start command has been received, a data table for performing a demo display is read from the display side ROM 123 and displayed on the display side RAM 124. Execute the process to write to.

  Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 16), if a negative determination is made in step S702, or after the process of step S703 is executed, a pointer update process is executed in step S704. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated to advance by one frame. As a result, the display-side MPU 122 can grasp the processing necessary to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing.

  In subsequent step S705, task processing is executed. In the task process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not additional data exists in an area corresponding to the information of the current pointer in the data table. If there is no additional data, the task data of the current pointer is read from the data table in step S1002, and one frame corresponding to the current update timing is read in accordance with the read task data in step S1003. In order to display the image of the minute, the calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 125 is performed. Thereafter, the task process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if additional data exists in the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the data table, it is determined in step S1004 whether the additional data is additional data for the task data image. . If it is additional data, in step S1005, the task data and additional data of the current pointer are read from the data table, and in the subsequent step S1006, the current update timing is supported according to the read task data and additional data. In order to display the image for one frame, calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 125 is performed. Thereafter, the task process is terminated. In addition, as a case where the process of step S1005 and step S1006 is performed, the case where the character image of an alert | report is added is mentioned.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the additional data of the current pointer is read from the data table in step S1007, and in step S1008, 1 corresponding to the current update timing is read according to the read additional data. In order to display an image for a frame, calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 125 is performed. Thereafter, the task process is terminated. In addition, as a case where the process of step S1007 and step S1008 is performed, the case where an operation effect is performed is mentioned.

  Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 16), after the task process is executed in step S705, in step S706, the command data is stored in the data table in the data output area corresponding to the current pointer information. Determine if it exists. If command data exists, it is command output timing, so command setting processing is executed in step S707.

  In the command setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not it is a timing corresponding to the execution of the confirmed effect in the symbol display device 31. The finalized effect is an effect for notifying that the game result of the current game round is a jackpot result at a timing before the timing at which the stop result is displayed. There are a plurality of types of execution timings of the finalized effects in the symbol display device 31. For example, there are timings during execution of the notice display, timings during execution of normal reach, and timings during execution of super reach. In the data table of FIG. 18, a confirmed effect in the symbol display device 31 is set as a timing during the execution of super reach.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the confirmation processing command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112 in step S1102, and then this setting process ends. The confirmation execution command includes information indicating that a confirmation effect is performed in the symbol display device 31. In addition, the confirmation execution command includes information indicating how many frames from the output timing of the command the confirmation effect should start. Thereby, even if the confirmation execution command is transmitted at a timing before the start timing of the confirmed effect, the sound light side MPU 112 synchronizes with the start of the confirmed effect in the symbol display device 31, and various light emitting unit groups 71 to 71. 73 and the confirmed effect in the speaker unit 45 can be started.

  The fixed execution command is set so that the output trigger is one time at the maximum in one pattern data table. Thereby, it is prevented that the fixed effect is generated a plurality of times in the symbol display device 31 in one game time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a fixed execution command can be output a plurality of times in one pattern data table may be adopted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not it is the start timing of the operation valid period. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1103, the operation valid start command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112 in step S1104, and then this setting process is terminated. The operation valid start command includes information indicating that the operation of the effect operation device 48 should be validated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1103, it is determined in step S1105 whether or not “1” is set in the operation flag of the display side RAM 124. If “1” is set in the operation presence flag, the operation valid command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112 in step S1106, and then this setting process is terminated. The operation valid command includes information indicating that the operation of the rendering operation device 48 is an operation within the valid period. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1105, the operation presence flag is cleared to “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S 1105, it is determined in step S 1107 whether or not “1” is set in the operation effect flag of the display side RAM 124. If “1” is set in the operation effect flag, the operation effect command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112 in step S1108, and then this setting process is terminated. The operation effect command includes information indicating that an operation effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 48 is performed, and information on the type of the operation effect. The operation effect command includes information indicating how many frames from the output timing of the command the operation effect should be started. Thereby, even if the operation effect command is transmitted at a timing before the start timing of the operation effect, the sound light side MPU 112 synchronizes with the start of the operation effect in the symbol display device 31 and performs various light emitting unit groups 71 to 71. 73 and an operation effect in the speaker unit 45 can be started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1107, other command transmission processing is executed in step S1109, and then this setting processing is terminated. In the other command transmission processing, a command indicating that the game times should be started, a command indicating that the notice display should be started, a command indicating that normal reach should be started, and super reach should be started. Command indicating that the variation should be ended, command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode effect should be started, command indicating that the effect of the round game should be started, and starting the effect of the interval between round games A command indicating that the ending effect should be started, a command indicating that the demonstration display should be started, and the like are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112 in accordance with each timing.

  In this case, a command indicating that the notice display should be started, a command indicating that the normal reach should be started, a command indicating that the super reach should be started, a command indicating that the production in the opening / closing execution mode should be started, round The command indicating that the production of the game should be started, the command indicating that the production of the interval between round games should be started, and the command indicating that the production of the ending should be started include the contents of the type of the production. include.

  In addition, a command indicating that a notice display should be started, a command indicating that normal reach should be started, a command indicating that super reach should be started, a command indicating that variation should be ended, and a round game effect are provided. The command indicating that it should be started includes information indicating how many frames after the output timing of the command the target effect should be started. Thereby, even if each command is transmitted at a timing before the start timing of the target effect, the sound light side MPU 112 synchronizes with the start of the target effect in the symbol display device 31, and various light emitting units. It is possible to start a target effect in the groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45.

  Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 16), when a negative determination is made in step S706, or after executing the process of step S707, the V interrupt process is executed after executing the drawing list output process in step S708. Exit.

  In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 125. In this case, in the drawing list, an image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is a drawing target, and parameter information updated in the task process is set together. The VDP 125 creates drawing data in the frame area of the video RAM 127 according to this drawing list. The VDP 125 outputs a signal to the symbol display device 31 in accordance with the drawing data created in the frame area. As a result, an image for one frame is displayed on the symbol display device 31.

<Display-side command handling processing of the sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the display side command response process executed in step S504 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) in the sound light side MPU 112 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the display side command handling process.

  First, in step S1201, a command indicating that an effect of game times should be started, a command indicating that an effect of opening / closing execution mode should be started, a command indicating that an effect of an interval between round games should be started, and an ending It is determined whether or not any of a command indicating that the presentation is to be started and a command indicating that the demonstration display is to be started is received. If any of these commands is received, in step S1202, the light emission data reading process is executed and the sound output data reading process is executed. In this case, since the process for starting the image display of the corresponding effect has already been executed in the symbol display device 31, the execution control of the effect using the light emission data and the sound output data read in step S1202 is performed. Will start immediately. The light emission data reading process and the sound output data reading process will be described in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1203 whether a fixed execution command has been received from the display-side MPU 122. If the confirmation execution command has been received, in step S1208, the light emission data reading process at the time of the confirmed effect and the sound output data reading process at the time of the confirmed effect are executed. The contents of these reading processes will be described later in detail. As described above, by executing the reading process of the light emission data and the sound output data, the finalized effects in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 are subsequently executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not a command to start super reach is received from the display-side MPU 122. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, a big hit result is generated in the current game round by confirming the game result information stored in the retained data area 161 of the sound light side RAM 114 in step S1205. It is determined whether or not to do. If a jackpot result occurs, in step S1206, a lottery process for determining whether or not to generate a confirmed effect is executed. In the lottery process, a lottery process is performed so that if the result is a low-accuracy big hit result, the finalized effect is won with a probability of 1/20, and if the result is a high-precision big hit result, the finalized prize is won with a probability of 1/5. Execute. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery process for the finalizing effect is not limited to the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the finalizing effect. Good. Thereafter, in step S1207, it is determined whether or not the confirmed effect has been won. If the confirmed effect has been won, in step S1208, the light emission data reading process at the confirmed effect and the sound output data at the confirmed effect are read. Read processing is executed. The contents of these reading processes will be described later in detail. As described above, by executing the reading process of the light emission data and the sound output data, the finalized effects in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 are subsequently executed.

  On the other hand, if a command indicating that super reach should be started has not been received, a negative determination is made in step S1204 and the processing in step S1208 is not executed. Even if a command indicating that super reach is to be started is received, if the current game round is not a jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S1205 and the process of step S1208 is performed. Do not execute. Even if the current game round is a big hit result, a negative determination is made in step S1207 and the process in step S1208 is not executed even if the final game lottery process is missed.

  Here, when the confirmed effect is executed in the symbol display device 31, the confirmed effect is executed in the symbol display device 31 while the command data of the confirmed execution command is set in the pattern data table. In the case where the final effect can be executed in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45, the command data of the corresponding command is not set in the pattern data table. Instead, the timing at which the definite effect is executed only in these various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 is set as the start time of super reach, and a command indicating that super reach should be started is displayed. It is determined whether or not the determined effect should be executed in the sound light side MPU 112 in response to transmission from the side MPU 122. By adopting such a configuration, it is not necessary to set command data indicating the execution timing in the pattern data table for the finalized effect that is not executed in the symbol display device 31, so that the data capacity of the pattern data table is reduced. In addition, the design is facilitated.

  On the other hand, when a command indicating that the super reach is to be started is transmitted from the display side MPU 122, it is determined whether or not the game time of this time is a jackpot result in the sound side MPU 112. On the condition that the game time is a jackpot result, the symbol display device 31 determines execution of the selective finalizing effect that is not linked. As a result, in the configuration in which the data capacity of the pattern data table is reduced and the setting is facilitated as described above, it is possible to prevent a definite effect from being executed in a game round that does not result in a jackpot.

  In addition, even if the game number is a jackpot result, the symbol display device 31 is not determined to execute the selective finalizing effect that is not interlocked unless the finalizing effect is won in the finalizing lottery process. Thereby, in the said structure, it becomes possible to give irregularity about execution of a definite effect.

  Furthermore, when a finalized effect is executed on the symbol display device 31, execution of the finalized effects in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 is determined without executing a finalized lottery process. Thereby, it is suppressed that deviation about execution of a definite effect between the symbol display device 31, various light emission part groups 71-73, and the speaker part 45 arises.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204, a negative determination is made in step S1205, a negative determination is made in step S1207, or if the process of step S1208 is executed, the moving object is determined in step S1209. It is determined whether it corresponds to the operation start timing. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, a moving object effect setting process is executed in step S1210. In the movable object effect setting process, various data settings for starting the movable object effect corresponding to the command currently received from the display-side MPU 122 are performed. Details of the processing contents of the setting processing will be described later. Since the process of starting the image display of the effect corresponding to the operation start timing has not been executed yet, the execution control of the movable object effect using the data set in step S1210 is performed. It will be started in synchronization with the start of.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1209, or after the processing of step S1210 has been executed, whether or not a command corresponding to the stop command for the movable discs 62a and 62b has been received from the display-side MPU 122 in step S1211. Determine. The movable object effect using the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is executed in the game times, but the output information of the command for starting the movable object effect and the stop for stopping the movable object effect. Command output information corresponding to the command is preset in the game data pattern data table. Further, there are a plurality of types of execution periods of the movable object effect using the disk movable objects 62a and 62b, and a pattern data table is set according to the types of the execution periods, and between the pattern data tables. Are different in the output information setting mode of the start command and the stop command.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1211, "1" is set to a stop command flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114. The stop command flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 112 that the disk effect using the disk movable objects 62a and 62b should be stopped.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1211, or after the processing of step S1212 is executed, it is determined in step S1213 whether or not it is the update timing of the light emission data. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1213, a light emission data read process is executed in step S1214. In this case, since the process for starting the image display of the effect corresponding to the update timing has not yet been executed, the execution control of the effect using the light emission data read in step S1214 is performed. It will be started in synchronization with the start of. The light emission data reading process will be described in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1213, or after the processing in step S1214 is executed, it is determined in step S1215 whether or not it is the update timing of the sound output data. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1215, a sound output data read process is executed in step S1216. In this case, since the process for starting the image display of the effect corresponding to the update timing has not yet been executed, the execution control of the effect using the sound output data read in step S1216 is performed for the image of the corresponding effect. It is started in synchronization with the start of display. The sound output data reading process will be described in detail later.

  If the process of step S1202 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S1215, or if the process of step S1216 is executed, it is determined in step S1217 whether an operation effect command is received. . If an operation effect command has not been received, the display side command handling process is terminated. If an operation effect command has been received, the display side command response process is terminated after the operation system response process is executed in step S1218.

  The operation system corresponding processing in step S1218 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether an operation valid start command has been received. If the operation valid start command has been received, after setting the operation valid period in step S1302, the operation related processing is terminated. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S508 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 112.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1303 whether an operation valid command has been received. If an operation valid command has been received, in step S1304, an execution permission command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 122, and after the operation valid period has been canceled, this operation-related processing ends. By canceling the operation valid period, a negative determination is made in step S508 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 112.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1303, it is determined in step S1305 whether an operation effect command has been received. If an operation effect command has been received, in step S1306, the light emission data reading process is executed and the sound output data reading process is executed, and then the operation system corresponding process is terminated. These readout processes will be described in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1305, it means that an operation valid end command has been received. In this case, after canceling the operation valid period in step S1307, this operation system corresponding process is terminated.

<Contents of communication when operation effect is executed>
Next, the contents of communication when an operation effect is executed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 24A shows a period in which the operation of the effect operation device 48 is set to be valid in the pattern data table read by the display side MPU 122, and FIG. 24B shows the effect operation in the sound light side MPU 112. The period during which the operation of the device 48 is set to be valid is shown, FIG. 24C shows the operation status of the effect operation device 48, FIG. 24D shows whether or not the operation effect is executed, and FIG. Indicates the content of a command transmitted from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112, and FIG. 24 (f) indicates the content of a command transmitted from the sound light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122.

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 24A, the start timing of the operation valid period set in the pattern data table is reached, so that the sound from the display side MPU 122 is displayed as shown in FIG. An operation valid start command is transmitted to the optical side MPU 112. Thereby, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 24B, the sound operation side MPU 112 becomes the operation effective period of the effect operation device 48.

  Thereafter, the operation of the effect operation device 48 is started at the timing t3 during the effective period of the effect operation device 48 in both the pattern data table and the sound side MPU 112. As a result, as shown in FIG. 24 (f), the operation generation command is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122. Since the operation generation command is transmitted in the pattern data table during the effective period of the effect operating device 48, as shown in FIG. 24 (e), at the timing t4, from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112. An operation valid command is sent. Thereby, the effective period of the operation of the effect operation device 48 in the sound light side MPU 112 is canceled. And as shown in FIG.24 (f), the execution permission command which permits execution of an operation effect is transmitted from the sound light side MPU112 to the display side MPU122 at the timing of t5.

  By receiving the execution permission command, the display side MPU 122 starts the operation effect as shown in FIG. 24D at the timing of t6, and outputs the operation effect command as shown in FIG. Transmit to the optical MPU 112. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24C, the operation of the effect operating device 48 is finished at the timing t7, and the effect in the pattern data table is obtained at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. This is the end timing of the operation effective period of the operation device 48.

  As described above, the start timing and the end timing of the operation effective period of the rendering operation device 48 are specified by the display side MPU 122 based on the data table read out by the display side MPU 122, and the respective timings from the display side MPU 122. Is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112, each timing is specified in the sound light side MPU 112. With this configuration, it is not necessary to have a data table in the sound light side MPU 112 that can uniquely specify the operation valid period of the effect operating device 48, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  The display side MPU 122 performs display control of moving image display on the symbol display device 31, whereas the sound light side MPU 112 performs light emission control of various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and sound output control of the speaker unit 45. Therefore, the processing load is relatively lighter on the sound light side MPU 112 than on the display side MPU 122. In this case, it is possible to distribute the processing load by monitoring whether or not the production operation device 48 is operated in the sound light side MPU 112.

  The sound light side MPU 112 does not monitor the operation signal from the effect operating device 48 until receiving the operation effective start command from the display side MPU 122, but monitors the operation signal by receiving the operation effective start command. It is the structure to perform. As a result, the sound light side MPU 112 does not need to constantly monitor the operation signal from the effect operating device 48, and the monitoring burden can be reduced.

  The sound light side MPU 112 transmits an operation generation command when the effect operation device 48 is operated during the operation effective period, and the display side MPU 122 refers to the pattern data table when the operation generation command is received. Then, it is determined whether or not the timing at which the operation generation command is received is within the operation effective period defined in the pattern data table. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the operation of the effect operation device 48 is in the operation effective period, not only in the sound side MPU 112 but also in the display side MPU 122, and the effect operation device 48 is in the operation effective period. It becomes possible to accurately monitor whether or not an operation has been performed.

  When the display side MPU 122 receives an operation generation command from the sound light side MPU 112 during the operation valid period, the display side MPU 122 transmits an operation valid command indicating that the operation is valid to the sound light side MPU 112. And the sound light side MPU 112 cancels the monitoring of the presence / absence of the operation of the rendering operation device 48 by receiving the operation valid command. Thus, the sound light side MPU 112 can cancel the monitoring of the operation of the effect operation device 48 without waiting for the start of the operation effect, thereby reducing the monitoring burden on the sound light side MPU 112.

  When the sound light side MPU 112 receives an operation valid command from the display side MPU 122, it transmits an execution permission command to the display side MPU 122. Then, the display side MPU 122 starts the operation effect by receiving the execution permission command. As a result, the display side MPU 122 can start the operation effect after confirming that the operation valid command has been normally received by the sound light side MPU 112.

  The display side MPU 122 transmits an operation effect command to the sound light side MPU 112 when starting the operation effect, and the sound light side MPU 112 receives the operation effect command, thereby responding to the operation effect executed in the symbol display device 31. The operation effects are also executed in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45. This makes it possible to reliably synchronize these operation effects.

<Light emission control in the sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the contents of the light emission control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 executed by the sound light side MPU 112 will be described.

  The sound light side MPU 112 uses the light emission data group 151 stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 113 when performing light emission control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. In this use, a part of the light emission data group 151 is read into the light emission data area 162 provided in the display side RAM 124 and used. The light emission data group 151 and the light emission data area 162 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the light emission data group 151, and FIG. 25B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the light emission data area 162. FIGS. 26A to 26D and FIG. 27 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of each data included in the light emission data group 151.

  As shown in FIG. 25A, the light emission data group 151 includes a palette data group 151a, a start position data group 151b, a total time data group 151c, a duration data group 151d, and a list data group 151e. A group data group 151f and a data selection table 151g exist.

  The palette data group 151a includes a large number of palette data indicating the emission color switching pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26A, in the palette data 0, a switching pattern based on two emission colors is defined. Specifically, a pattern for switching to the white emission color next to the blue emission color is defined, and if the state where the palette data 0 is selected continues, the white emission color is followed by the blue emission. It will return to the color. Accordingly, in the palette data 0, a light emission color switching pattern of blue → white → blue → white → blue →... Is defined.

  In addition, the palette data 1 defines a switching pattern based on five emission colors, and the palette data 2 defines a switching pattern based on three emission colors. However, in the pallet data 1, one cycle of the switching pattern is defined as a pattern for displaying the set five emission colors once, whereas in the pallet data 2, the switching pattern 1 is set. The circumference is defined as a pattern for displaying at least one of the set three emission colors twice or more. Specifically, the palette data 1 defines a light emission color switching pattern of red → blue → green → yellow → white → red → blue → green →... A light emission color switching pattern of red → green → blue → green → blue → red → blue → red →... Is defined. There are a large number of palette data other than the palette data 0 to 2 described above.

  In each pallet data, sequential identification information is defined on a one-to-one basis for each emission color data to be switched. The identification information corresponds to start position data indicating from which light emission color to start light emission control when light emission control of one LED 71a to 73a is started using palette data.

  The start position data group 151b includes a target when the light emission color is switched using one of the palette data for each of the LEDs 71a to 73a included in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 to be light emission controlled. There are a large number of start position data indicating from which light emission color sequence the light emission control is to be started from among a series of light emission colors defined in the palette data. Here, when the sound light side MPU 112 performs the light emission control of the respective light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the palette data and the start position data are basically set in units of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. In this case, the start position data is data indicating the start position of the light emission color for each of the LEDs 71a to 73a included in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, while the LEDs 71a to 73a are between the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. The numbers are different. Therefore, the start position data is individually set for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 having a different number of LEDs 71a to 73a.

  The start position data will be specifically described with reference to FIG. The start position data 0 and the start position data 1 shown in FIG. 26B are an example of start position data applied to the second light emitting unit group 72 having 16 LEDs 72a. In each of the start position data 0 and the start position data 1, the start position number is determined in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the bits 0 to 15. In this case, each of bit 0 to bit 15 corresponds to one of the first LED 72a to the 16th LED 72a among the 16 LEDs 72a. Then, when starting the effect of switching the emission color in each LED 72a, the emission color in the order corresponding to the start position number set in the corresponding bit is specified from the palette data to be used, and the specified emission color The luminescent colors are switched sequentially.

  For example, when the start position data 0 is applied to the pallet data 0, the first LED 72a to the eighth LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 start from white, and the ninth LED 72a to the 16th LED 72a. Starts from blue. On the other hand, when the start position data 1 is applied to the pallet data 0, the first LED 72a to the eighth LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 start from blue, and the ninth LED 72a to the sixteenth LED 72a. Starts with white.

  The total time data group 151c includes a lot of total time data that can specify the total time for which one pallet data is used. For example, when the time required for one cycle of the selected pallet data switching pattern is shorter than the total time, the switching pattern is repeated until the total time elapses.

  In the duration data group 151d, there are a lot of duration data that make it possible to specify the duration of the state in which one emission color is turned on when the emission color is switched according to the selected palette data. For example, when 2 sec duration data is selected in the situation where the palette data 0 in FIG. 26 (a) is selected, the state in which the emission color is maintained in blue for 2 sec in one LED and the emission color is white The state of being maintained for 2 seconds is repeated.

  A large number of list data exists in the list data group 151e. In the case of using a plurality of pallet data simultaneously for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73, except that one pallet data is basically used for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73. The types of the plurality of palette data are defined as one list data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26C, in the list data 0, palette data 0, palette data 1, and palette data 2 are set as palette data to be used. In the list data 1, palette data 10, palette data 11, palette data 12, and palette data 13 are set as palette data to be used.

  In each list data, a sequential list number is defined on a one-to-one basis with respect to palette data to be used. The list number uses any pallet data for each LED 71a to 73a when selecting the pallet data to be used for each LED 71a to 73a included in one light emitting unit group 71 to 73 using the list data. It corresponds to the specified data indicating whether or not.

  The group data group 151f includes a large number of group data. In the group data, when list data is used for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73, each LED 71a to 73a included in one light emitting unit group 71 to 73 has each palette set in the list data. Data indicating which of the data is used is set. Here, the group data is data that individually indicates the palette data to be used for the LEDs 71a to 73a included in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, while the number of LEDs 71a to 73a among the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is as follows. It is different. Therefore, the group data is individually set for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 having a different number of LEDs 71a to 73a.

  The group data will be specifically described with reference to FIG. Group data 0 and group data 1 shown in FIG. 26D are examples of group data applied to the second light emitting unit group 72 having 16 LEDs 72a. In each of the group data 0 and the group data 1, a list number is defined in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the bits 0 to 15. In this case, each of bit 0 to bit 15 corresponds to one of the first LED 72a to the 16th LED 72a among the 16 LEDs 72a. When selecting the palette data to be used for each LED 72a, the palette data in the order corresponding to the list number set in the corresponding bit is specified from the list data to be used, and the specified palette data is used. To do.

  For example, when the group data 0 is applied to the list data 0, the palette data 0 is selected as the use target from the first LED 72a to the eighth LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72, and from the ninth LED 72a to 16th. Up to the second LED 72a, the palette data 1 is selected as an object to be used. On the other hand, when the group data 1 is applied to the list data 1, the pallet data 10 is selected as a use target from the first LED 72a to the fourth LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72, and the fifth LED 72a to 8 The pallet data 11 is selected as the use target up to the thirty-second LED 72a, the pallet data 12 is selected as the use target from the ninth LED 72a to the twelfth LED 72a, and the pallet data 13 from the thirteenth LED 72a to the sixteenth LED 72a. Is selected for use.

  The data selection table 151g is data in which a combination of data used in the light emission control of each light emitting unit group 71 to 73 is determined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, in the data selection table 151g, request numbers used for specifying combinations of data to be used are set for the number of types of the combinations, and each request number is assigned to each request number. Correspondingly, the type of pallet data, the type of start position data, the type of total time data, the type of duration data, the type of list data, and the type of group data are set.

  However, as already described, one pallet data is used for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73, with the exception that a plurality of palettes are used for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73. Data is used simultaneously. In the data selection table 151g, a request number corresponding to the basic combination and a request number corresponding to the exception combination are individually set. Specifically, the request numbers 0 to 10 and the like correspond to basic combinations, and the basic combinations include the type of pallet data, the type of start position data, the type of total time data, and the duration data. A type is defined, and a list data type and a group data type are not defined. On the other hand, the request numbers 120 to 130 and the like correspond to exception combinations. The exception combinations include the type of start position data, the type of total time data, the type of duration data, the type of list data, The type of group data is defined, and the type of palette data is not defined.

  Next, the light emission data area 162 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the light emission data area 162, each data included in the combination specified using the request number is read from the data selection table 151g, and light emission data is created using each data. The light emission data corresponds to a part of an effect of one game time when used for game times, and a part of an effect of one opening / closing execution mode when used for an opening / closing execution mode. It corresponds. On the other hand, when used for notification, it corresponds to the entire notification.

  Various types of light emission data are created in the light emission data area 162, and these light emission data are stored in different areas in the light emission data area 162 for each predetermined section. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25B, the light emission data area 162 is provided with a base area 162a, an interrupt area 162b, and a notification area 162c.

  The base area 162a stores light emission data for normal performance. The situation in which the light data for normal production is used includes, for example, a situation in which no notice display or reach display is performed when a game is played on the symbol display device 31. In the base area 162a, areas corresponding to the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 are provided on a one-to-one basis, and correspond to the respective light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. The normal production light emission data is stored separately.

  In the base area 162a, for example, if the light emission data is for game times, only one light emission data is stored for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in one game time. Among them, the execution of the light emission color switching pattern using the single light emission data is repeated. For example, in the case of light emission data for the opening / closing execution mode, only one light emission data is stored for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in one opening / closing execution mode, and in the one opening / closing execution mode. The execution of the emission color switching pattern using the single emission data is repeated. In these cases, in the combination data for creating the light emission data, data with no time limit is selected as the total time data.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a plurality of light data of normal effects can be set, such as light data of normal effects in the first half and light data of normal effects in the second half, in one game round. Ordinary effect light emission data other than the notice display and the reach display, the normal effect light emission data for the notice display, the normal effect light emission data for the reach display, and the normal effect light emission data for the final stop display. It is good also as a structure by which. In this way, a configuration in which a plurality of light emission data of normal effects can be set during a series of effects may be applied to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The interrupt area 162b stores data used for the light control for the interrupt effect that has priority over the light control for the normal effect. The situation in which the light emission data for the interrupt effect is used includes, for example, a situation in which a notice display or a reach display is performed when the game display is performed on the symbol display device 31. In addition, the situation where the light emission data for the interrupt effect is used includes a situation where the final effect is performed. Further, there is a situation where a promotion effect is performed during the opening / closing execution mode. The interrupt area 162b is provided with an area corresponding to the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 on a one-to-one basis, and corresponds to each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. The light emission data for the interrupt effect is stored individually.

  In the interruption area 162b, for example, if it is light emission data for game times, there are a plurality of light emission data that can be stored for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in one game time. During rotation, the plurality of light emission data are appropriately rewritten in each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. For example, in the case of light emission data for the opening / closing execution mode, the plurality of light emission data is appropriately rewritten in each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in one opening / closing execution mode. These rewritings are performed according to the priority between the light emission data. The contents of the rewrite priority will be described in detail later.

  In the notification area 162c, data used for notification light emission control that is prioritized over the light emission control for interrupt effects is stored. The situation where the notification light emission data is used is a case where the occurrence of a notification target event in the pachinko machine 10 is detected and a notification command is transmitted from the main MPU 92. In the notification area 162c, areas corresponding to the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 are provided on a one-to-one basis, and correspond to the respective light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. The light emission data for notification to be stored is individually stored.

  In the notification area 162c, only one light emission data is stored for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 when the notification target event occurs, and in the situation where the notification target event occurs, the one light emission is stored. The execution of the emission color switching pattern using data is repeated. In this case, in the combination data for creating the light emission data, data with no time limit is selected as the total time data. Note that the situation of using the notification light emission data is continued until a cancel command is received from the main MPU 92.

<Reading process of light emission data of sound-side MPU 112>
Next, the light emission data reading process in steps S1202, S1208, and S1212 in the display side command handling process (FIG. 22) of the sound light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The light emission data reading process is individually executed for each of the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73. In the following description of the light emission data reading process, the process for the second light emitting unit group 72 will be described as an example, but the same applies to the first light emitting unit group 71 and the third light emitting unit group 73.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the area to which light emission data is to be written is the notification area 162c. If it is the notification area 162c, in step S1402, the type of combination of various data corresponding to the request number included in the notification command received this time is specified from the data selection table 151g, and the specified combination type is set. Various corresponding data are read out from the sound side ROM 113. In step S1403, a data expansion process is executed using the read various data, and the light emission data is written in the notification area 162c. In this case, since the same type of data is read regardless of the content of the received notification command, the same light emission data is written. That is, regardless of the notification target event, the second light emitting unit group 72 performs notification in the same manner.

  After that, in step S1404, 1 is set to the light-emitting side notification setting flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 114, and then this reading process is terminated. The light emission side notification setting flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify whether or not the light emission data exists in the notification area 162c. The state where 1 is set in the notification setting flag on the light emitting side is cleared in the cancel setting process in step S627 of the main command response process (FIG. 15) by receiving the cancel command from the main MPU 92. At this time, the light emission data stored in the notification area 162c is cleared.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the area to which light emission data is to be written is the base area 162a. If it is the base area 162a, in step S1406, the type of combination of various data corresponding to the request number included in the command received this time is specified from the data selection table 151g, and the type of the specified combination is supported. The various data thus read are read out from the sound side ROM 113. In step S1407, data expansion processing is executed using the read various data, and light emission data is written in the base area 162a. Thereafter, the reading process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1405, it is determined in step S1408 whether the light emission data to be written this time corresponds to a confirmed effect. If it corresponds to the confirmed effect, in step S1409, the combination type of various data corresponding to the request number for the present confirmed effect is specified from the data selection table 151g, and the specified combination type is supported. The various data thus read are read out from the sound side ROM 113. In step S1410, a data expansion process is executed using the various read data, and the light emission data is written in the interrupt area 162b. Thereafter, in step S1411, the interrupt setting flag provided in the sound side RAM 114 is set to 1, and the light emission side priority data corresponding to the light emission data for the confirmed effect is read from the sound light side ROM 113 and the sound light side is read. After writing to the RAM 114, the reading process is terminated.

  The interrupt setting flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify whether or not the light emission data exists in the interrupt area 162b. The light emission side priority data already exists when there is an instruction to write new light emission data to the interrupt area 162b in a situation where the light emission data already exists in the interrupt area 162b. This is data for determining the priority when determining whether to use the light emission data as the light emission data for interruption as it is or to use the light emission data newly instructed for writing as the light emission data for interruption. For the light emission side priority data, the light emission data corresponding to the confirmed effect has the highest priority, and after that, for the effect for game play, the light emission data with higher expectation of the jackpot result of the target effect has priority. As for the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the light emission data corresponding to the promotion effect is set to have a higher priority.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1408, light emission side priority data P1 corresponding to the light emission data set in the current interrupt area 162b is read in step S1412, and this time writing is performed in subsequent step S1413. The emission side priority data P2 corresponding to the instructed emission data is read. In step S1414, it is determined whether or not P2> P1, so that the light emission data for which writing has been instructed this time has priority over the light emission data set in the current interrupt area 162b. Determine whether the degree is high.

  If light emission data is not set in the current interrupt area 162b, an affirmative determination is made in step S1414, and the light emission data for which writing has been instructed this time is written in the interrupt area 162b.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1414, it means that the light emission data set in the current interruption area 162b has a higher priority. Therefore, the present reading process is terminated without writing the emission data for which writing is instructed this time to the interrupt area 162b.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1414, it means that the light emission data for which writing is instructed this time has a higher priority. Accordingly, in step S1415, the type of combination of various data corresponding to the request number that is the target of the current write instruction is specified from the data selection table 151g, and the various types of data corresponding to the specified type of combination are stored in the sound signal. Read from the side ROM 113. In step S1416, the data development processing is executed using the read various data, and the light emission data is written in the interrupt area 162b. Thereafter, in step S1417, 1 is set to the interrupt setting flag provided in the sound side RAM 114, and the light emission side priority data corresponding to the newly written light emission data is read from the sound light side ROM 113 and the sound light is read. After writing to the side RAM 114, the reading process is terminated.

  The request number referred to in step S1415 is read from the command when the process of step S1415 is executed according to the command received from the display side MPU 122, and will be described later in the sound light side MPU 112. When the process of step S1415 is executed due to the execution of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), it is set in the movable object control process.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing data expansion processing activated in the case of steps S1403, S1407, S1410, and S1416.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined whether the data to be expanded is a basic combination. If it is a basic combination, the value of the creation target bit provided in the sound light side RAM 114 is set to “0” in step S1502. As a result, the first LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 is a target for creating light emission data.

  In subsequent step S1503, the start position number of the creation target bit is acquired from the start position data read in correspondence with the request number. In step S1504, by referring to the pallet data read corresponding to the request number, the switching pattern is read based on the start position number acquired in step S1503.

  In subsequent step S1505, the continuous time data is converted into pointer information and set, and in step S1506, the total time data is converted into pointer information and set. Here, the sound light side MPU 112 is configured to execute the light emission control process by the timer interruption process (FIG. 14) activated at a cycle of 4 msec. In each processing time of the light emission control process, 1 pointer information of the light emission data is set. Update. Therefore, in step S1505 and step S1506, conversion to the pointer information is performed so that the quotient value obtained when the duration data and the total time data are divided by 4 msec becomes the final pointer information.

  Incidentally, when data without time restriction is set as the total time data, it is assumed that the total time data does not exist, and data for one cycle of the emission color switching pattern is created as the emission data. On the other hand, when data other than data with no time limit is set as the total time data, that is, data with a time limit is set, the last pointer information and the time corresponding to the total time data have passed. Thus, the emission color switching pattern for the total time data is set. In this case, if the total time data exceeds the time corresponding to one cycle of the emission color switching pattern in relation to the duration data, the emission color switching pattern exceeding one cycle is set. It becomes.

  By executing the processing of steps S1503 to S1506, light emission data for the LED corresponding to the current value of the bit to be created is created. Thereafter, by adding 1 to the value of the creation target bit in step S1507, the creation target of the light emission data is updated to the LED in the next order. In step S1508, it is determined whether or not the value of the creation target bit exceeds the number of LEDs included in the second light emitting unit group 72.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1508, light emission data is created by executing the processing in steps S1503 to S1506 for the LED corresponding to the updated value of the creation target bit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1508, in step S1509, each light emission data created this time is written in the area to be written among the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c. Thereafter, the data expansion process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1510. In step S1510, the value of the creation target bit in the sound side RAM 114 is set to “0”. As a result, the first LED 72A of the second light emitting unit group 72 is a target for creating light emission data.

  In subsequent step S1511, the list number of the creation target bit is acquired from the group data read in correspondence with the request number. In step S 1512, the palette data corresponding to the list number acquired in step S 1511 is read from the sound light side ROM 113 by referring to the list data read corresponding to the request number.

  Thereafter, in step S1513, the start position number of the creation target bit is acquired from the start position data read in correspondence with the request number, and in step S1514, the palette data read in step S1512 is referred to. A switching pattern is read with reference to the start position number acquired in step S1513. In subsequent step S1515, the continuous time data is converted into pointer information and set, and in step S1516, the total time data is converted into pointer information and set.

  By executing the processing in steps S1511 to S1516, light emission data for the LED corresponding to the current value of the creation target bit is created. In particular, in this case, the combination data read corresponding to the request number is an exceptional combination, and the light emission data is created using the group data and the list data. Therefore, each LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 is generated. It is possible to create light emission data based on different pallet data for each and diversify the light emission patterns.

  Thereafter, by adding 1 to the value of the creation target bit in step S1517, the creation target of the light emission data is updated to the next LED in the order. In step S1518, it is determined whether or not the value of the creation target bit exceeds the number of LEDs included in the second light emitting unit group 72.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1518, light emission data is created by executing the processing in steps S1511 to S1516 for the LED corresponding to the updated value of the creation target bit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1518, in step S1519, each light emission data created this time is written in the area to be written among the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c. Thereafter, the data expansion process is terminated.

  An example of the light emission data created when the data expansion process is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 30 shows light emission data created when the palette data 0 of FIG. 26A and the start position data 0 of FIG. 26B are applied to the LEDs 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72. FIG. It is an example of the light emission data stored in the base area 162a of the light emission data area 162. In this case, since the luminescent color is set twice in the palette data 0, the pointer information is set as a serial number so that the number corresponding to twice the time corresponding to the duration data becomes the final pointer information. Is done. More specifically, in the palette data 0, the light emission color switching pattern of blue → white is set and 4 sec is set as the duration data, so that the final pointer information becomes “1999”. Pointer information is set by serial number. In addition, the LED 72a corresponding to bit 0 to bit 7 generates light emission data for 4 seconds after the blue light emission color continues for 4 seconds, and the LED 72a corresponding to bit 8 to bit 15 is a white light emission data. After the emission color is continued for 4 seconds, the emission data for generating the blue emission color for 4 seconds is created.

<Light emission control processing of sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the light emission control process of step S505 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The light emission control process is executed individually for each of the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73. In the following description of the light emission control process, the process for the second light emitting unit group 72 will be described as an example, but the same applies to the first light emitting unit group 71 and the third light emitting unit group 73.

  First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the notification setting flag of the sound side RAM 114. If “1” is set in the notification setting flag, in step S1602, each LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 emits light based on data corresponding to the current pointer information in the light emission data of the notification area 162c. Control.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not “1” is set in the interrupt setting flag of the sound side RAM 114. If “1” is set in the interrupt setting flag, in step S1604, the LEDs 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 emit light based on the data corresponding to the current pointer information in the light emission data of the interrupt area 162b. Control.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1603, in step S1605, the LEDs 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 are controlled to emit light based on data corresponding to the current pointer information in the emission data of the base area 162a.

  That is, the light emission data can be simultaneously stored in each of the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c of the light emission data area 162. However, the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c Of these, the light emission data stored in the notification area 162c has the highest priority in light emission control. Accordingly, it is possible to prioritize the notification over the execution of the production, and it is possible to make the game hall manager recognize that the notification target event such as an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. In the case where the light emission data is not stored in the notification area 162c, the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b is prioritized next in the light emission control. Thereby, priority is given to the execution of the finalized effect and the effect with high expectation, and it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to the effect in the light emission part groups 71-73.

  After the processing of step S1602, step S1604, or step S1605 is executed, the pointer information is the final pointer of the light emission data stored in the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c in step S1606. It is determined whether or not the light emission data that is information exists. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1606, it is determined in step S1607 whether the area that is the final pointer information is the base area 162a or the notification area 162c. If it is the base area 162a or the notification area 162c, in step S1608, the pointer information of the light emission data that is the final pointer information is returned to the start pointer information. By executing the return process, the pointer information of the light emission data that is the return target is repeatedly updated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1607, the interrupt setting flag of the sound light side RAM 114 is cleared to “0” in step S1609, and clear processing for the interrupt area 162b is executed. That is, the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b is cleared by becoming the last pointer information.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1606, when the process of step S1608 is executed, or when the process of step S1609 is executed, the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b of the light emission data area 162, and the interrupt area 162b are executed in step S1610. The pointer information update process is executed for each of the notification areas 162c. Thereby, in the next processing time of the light emission control process, the light emission control is executed based on the data corresponding to the new pointer information. However, in the update processing of the pointer information, the light emission data that is the target of the return processing to the start pointer information in step S1608 is not processed. Thereafter, the main light emission control process is terminated.

<State of light emission control>
Next, how light emission control is performed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. FIG. 32A shows the execution state of the normal effect, FIG. 32B shows the execution state of the reach effect, FIG. 32C shows the execution state of the final effect, and FIG. FIG. 32 (e) shows whether or not a command indicating that light emission data should be stored in the interrupt area 162b (hereinafter referred to as an interrupt setting command) is received. In the following description, a light emission effect in the second light emitting unit group 72 will be described. Further, in FIG. 32, the actually selected light emission control mode is surrounded by a surrounding line.

  By storing the light emission data in the base area 162a at the timing of t1, a normal effect is started in the second light emitting unit group 72 as shown in FIG. Then, by receiving an interrupt setting command as shown in FIG. 32 (e) at the timing t2, which is the situation in which the normal effect is being executed, the light emission data corresponding to the reach effect is stored in the interrupt area 162b. Then, the normal effect is stopped as shown in FIG. 32A, and the reach effect is started in the second light emitting unit group 72 as shown in FIG. However, the pointer of the light emission data stored in the base area 162a even in the situation where the reach effect is performed by performing the light emission control using the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b. The update will continue.

  Thereafter, an interrupt setting command corresponding to the confirmed effect is received as shown in FIG. 32E at the timing t3 when the reach effect is being executed. Since the light emission data corresponding to the confirmed effect has the highest priority among the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b, the light emission data corresponding to the confirmed effect is overwritten in the interrupt area 162b, and FIG. As shown in the figure, the definite effect is started in the second light emitting unit group 72. In this case, the light emission data corresponding to the reach effect previously stored in the interrupt area 162b is deleted. Further, even in a situation where a definite effect is being performed by performing light emission control using the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b, a pointer to the light emission data stored in the base area 162a. The update will continue.

  Thereafter, an interrupt setting command is received as shown in FIG. 32 (e) at the timing of t4, which is a situation in which a definite effect is being executed. However, since the priority of the light emission data corresponding to the effect instructed by the interrupt setting command is lower than the priority of the light emission data corresponding to the confirmed effect, the interruption area 162b is not overwritten and the confirmed effect is not performed. The light emission data corresponding to is used as it is.

  After that, by receiving a notification command at the timing t5, which is a situation where the finalized effect is being executed, the light emission data corresponding to the notification is stored in the notification area 162c. Thereby, the confirmed effect is stopped as shown in FIG. 32 (c), and the notification is started in the second light emitting unit group 72 as shown in FIG. 32 (d). However, even in a situation where notification is performed by performing light emission control using the light emission data stored in the notification area 162c, the pointer of the light emission data stored in the base area 162a is updated. , And the pointer update of the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b is continued.

  After that, by receiving the release command at the timing of t6, the notification area 162c is cleared and the notification setting flag on the light emission side is cleared to “0”. As a result, the notification is ended as shown in FIG. 32 (d), and the confirmed effect using the light emission data stored in the interruption area 162b is resumed as shown in FIG. 32 (c). In this case, since the pointer update of the light emission data stored in the interruption area 162b has been continued even in the situation where the notification is being performed, the notification interruption is the light emission mode of the definite effect at the restarted timing. If there is no light emission, it is the same as the light emission mode of the definite effect at this timing. Therefore, even if a notification interruption occurs, the light emission mode of the finalized effect in the second light emitting unit group 72 and the display mode of the finalized effect in the symbol display device 31 can be synchronized after the timing when the notification is released. It becomes possible.

  Thereafter, when the finalized effect ends at the timing of t7, the interrupt area 162b is cleared and the interrupt setting flag is cleared to “0”. As a result, the finalized effect is ended as shown in FIG. 32 (c), and the normal effect using the light emission data stored in the base area 162a is resumed as shown in FIG. 32 (a). And the said normal production is complete | finished at the timing of t8.

<Sound output control in the sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the contents of the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 executed by the sound light side MPU 112 will be described.

  The sound light side MPU 112 uses the sound output data group 152 stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 113 when performing sound output control of the speaker unit 45. In this use, a part of the sound output data group 152 is read into the sound output data area 163 provided in the sound light side RAM 114 and used. The sound output data group 152 and the sound output data area 163 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the sound output data group 152, and FIG. 33B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the sound output data area 163.

  As shown in FIG. 33A, the sound output data group 152 includes a variation base data group 152a, a notice effect start time data group 152b, a notice effect end time data group 152c, and a normal reach time data group 152d. , Super reach data group 152e, finalized effect data group 152f, change end data group 152g, notification occurrence data group 152h, opening data group 152i, round data group 152j, and interval data There are at least a group 152k, an ending data group 152l, a promotion effect data group 152m, and a curtain effect data group 152n.

  In the variation base data group 152a, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting music repeated in a situation where no notice display or reach display is performed during game play. The notice effect start time data group 152b includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting the music from the start of the notice display to the end of the notice display. In the notice effect end time data group 152c, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting the music when the notice display is ended. The normal reach time data group 152d includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music that is repeated in a situation where the normal reach is performed. The super reach data group 152e includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music or sound in a situation where super reach is performed. The confirmed effect data group 152f includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music or sound in a situation where the confirmed effect is being performed. The variation end time data group 152g includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting a music piece when the symbol variation display is terminated during the game. In the notification occurrence data group 152h, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting notification sound or sound for notification. In the opening data group 152i, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting music in a situation where the opening effect is performed in the opening / closing execution mode. The round data group 152j includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music in a situation where an effect during a round game is being performed in the opening / closing execution mode. In the interval data group 152k, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting a music piece in a situation where an effect during the interval is performed in the opening / closing execution mode. The ending data group 152l includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music or sound in a situation where the ending effect is performed in the opening / closing execution mode. The promotion effect data group 152m includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music or sound in a situation where the promotion effect is performed in the opening / closing execution mode. The curtain group production data group 152n includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting sound effects when a later-described third stage production using the movable curtain plate 52 is performed during the game.

  That is, in the sound output data group 152, sound output data for the entire series of effects that are started at a predetermined trigger such as effects for game times and effects for opening and closing execution modes are not set as they are. In a state in which the sound output data for the entire series of productions is divided for each range in which the progress of the productions in the series production is different (for example, a range in which the type of appearing character is different or a range in which the variation display of the pattern is changed). Is set. A plurality of types of sound output data are set for each divided data. Therefore, when performing an effect for game play or an effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the divided data corresponding to the command transmitted from the main MPU 92 or the display MPU 122 is read, and the sound output control is performed according to the read divided data. Will be done.

  Incidentally, in the state where the sound output data is developed in the sound light side RAM 114, pointer information corresponding to the output duration for one cycle of the music, sound or notification sound set in the sound output data, Output content data corresponding to the pointer information on a one-to-one basis. A signal corresponding to the output content data set corresponding to the pointer information is output to the speaker unit 45, and the content of the signal output is changed in accordance with the update of the pointer information every time the sound is output. Music, sound or notification sound corresponding to the data is output.

  Next, the sound output data area 163 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The sound output data area 163 is provided with a plurality of sound output areas 171 to 186 so that a plurality of sound output data can be simultaneously read out and controlled. Specifically, 16 pieces of the first sound output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186 are provided. As a result, even when a new sound output data read command is issued in a situation where sound output control is performed using predetermined sound output data, the predetermined sound output data is read into the sound light side RAM 114. The new sound output data can be read out to the sound light side RAM 114 while maintaining the above. Further, the number of sound output areas 171 to 186 is set to be equal to or greater than the maximum number of sound output data that can be simultaneously read.

<Reading process of sound output data of sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the sound output data reading process in steps S1202, S1208, and S1214 in the display side command handling process (FIG. 22) of the sound light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not it is a reading process when a notification command is received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, in step S1702, the sound output data corresponding to the content of the received notification command is stored in the notification occurrence data group 152h in the sound output data group 152 of the sound side ROM 113. Read from inside. In step S 1703, the read sound output data is stored in the first sound output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186 in the sound output data area 163. Write to the upper area. Thereafter, in step S1704, the sound output side priority data for notification corresponding to the sound output data read this time is read from the sound side ROM 113, and the correspondence relationship with the sound output area to be written in step S1703. Is written into the sound-light side RAM 114 in a state where it can be specified.

  The sound output side priority data indicates whether sound output control is performed for sound output data stored in any sound output area in a situation where sound output data is stored in a plurality of sound output areas 171 to 186. This is data for determining the priority when the optical MPU 112 determines the priority. As for the sound output side priority data, the sound output data corresponding to the notification has the highest priority, and the sound output data corresponding to the confirmed effect has the next highest priority. The sound output data with higher expectation of the jackpot result of the target effect is set to have a higher priority, and the sound output data corresponding to the promotion effect has priority for the effect for the opening / closing execution mode It is set to be high.

  Incidentally, the sound output side priority data corresponds to the priority among the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b and the notification area 162c in the light emission data area 162, and the light emission side priority data. Thus, the event being executed and the event preferentially executed in the sound output control are configured to be the same. Therefore, the execution contents of the light emission control and the sound output control are the same.

  In a succeeding step S1705, it is determined whether or not the sound output side priority data for notification is already set in the sound light side RAM 114. If it has not been set, this read processing is terminated as it is. If it has already been set, the output start timing adjustment process is executed in step S1706, and then the read process is terminated.

  Here, in the alerting | reporting in the speaker part 45, the alerting | reporting sound or alerting | reporting sound corresponding to every event used as alerting | reporting is output. In other words, in the alarm occurrence data group 152h, sound output data is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the event to be notified, and the event to be notified has occurred in duplicate. In some cases, the sound output data for notification corresponding to each event is stored in different sound output areas. In this case, the sound output data for notification is set so that the sound output side priority data has the same priority, and in step S1706, the output start timing of each sound output data is shifted, thereby All the sound output data is set as a target of sound output control. Specifically, the start pointer information is adjusted such that the newly set sound output data for notification becomes the sound output control target following the already set sound output data for notification. In addition, in the situation where the notification state of the pachinko machine 10 is not released, the notification is repeated, but when a plurality of notification sound output data are set, notifications for different events are continued. The output state is repeated.

  Note that the sound output data for notification is cleared when a release command indicating that the notification target event corresponding to the sound output data has been released is received from the main MPU 92. At this time, the sound output side priority data for notification is also cleared.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1701, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not there are a plurality of sound output data to be read this time. The speaker unit 45 outputs a sound corresponding to the content of the moving image on the symbol display device 31. However, when a notice display is performed in an effect for game play, the notice display starts and the notice display is displayed. Sounds with different contents are output at the end. On the other hand, the display side MPU 122 does not output a command to the sound light side MPU 112 at each timing, but outputs a command corresponding to the notice display only at a timing corresponding to the start of the notice display. Therefore, when the sound light side MPU 112 receives a command corresponding to the notice display, it reads out sound output data corresponding to the start of the notice display and sound output data corresponding to the end of the notice display.

  Specifically, in step S1708, the sound output data on the front side is read from the sound output data group 152 of the light side ROM 113, and the read sound output data is read in the sound output data area 163 in step S1709. Of the first sound output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186, the sound output area in which no sound output data is stored is written in the uppermost area. Thereafter, in step S1710, the sound output side priority data corresponding to the sound output data read this time is read from the sound side ROM 113, and the correspondence relationship with the sound output area to be written in step S1709 can be specified. In this state, it is written in the sound light side RAM 114.

  Thereafter, in step S1711, the rear sound output data is read from the sound output data group 152 of the light-side ROM 113, and the read sound output data is read in the first sound in the sound output data area 163 in step S1712. Of the output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186, the uppermost area among the sound output areas in which no sound output data is stored is written. Thereafter, in step S1713, the sound output side priority data corresponding to the sound output data read this time is read from the sound side ROM 113, and the correspondence with the sound output area to be written in step S1712 can be specified. In this state, it is written in the sound light side RAM 114.

  In the subsequent step S1714, “1” is set to the output standby flag provided in the sound side RAM 114, and the output standby area setting process is executed. The output standby flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify that there is sound output data that is to be a target of sound output control, and in the output standby area setting process, Data for specifying the sound output area where the standby sound output data is stored is set, and the output start timing of the standby sound output data is set. Thereafter, the reading process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1707, in step S1715, the sound output data corresponding to the current read process is read from the sound output data group 152 of the sound side ROM 113, and the read sound output data is In step S1716, the first sound output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186 in the sound output data area 163 are written in the highest area among the sound output areas where no sound output data is stored. Thereafter, in step S1717, the sound output side priority data corresponding to the sound output data read this time is read from the sound side ROM 113, and the correspondence relationship with the sound output area to be written in step S1716 can be specified. In this state, it is written in the sound light side RAM 114.

  In the subsequent step S1718, “1” is set to the output standby flag provided in the sound side RAM 114, and the output standby area setting process is executed. The output standby flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify that there is sound output data that is to be a target of sound output control, and in the output standby area setting process, Data for specifying the sound output area where the standby sound output data is stored is set, and the output start timing of the standby sound output data is set. Thereafter, the reading process ends.

<Sound output control processing of the sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the sound output control process of step S506 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1801, among the sound output areas to be updated in the first sound output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186 in the sound output data area 163 of the sound light side RAM 114, the upper (first sound output area 171 is the highest). Each sound output side priority data set in the two sound output areas is read out. Here, the sound output area to be updated is a sound output area in which sound output data is stored, and is a sound output area for which output start timing is not set, that is, not in a standby state for sound output control. This refers to the sound output area. In the subsequent step S1802, it is specified which of the read sound output side priority data has a higher priority, and in step S1803, the sound output area on the higher priority side is set as an output area.

  In subsequent step S1804, the sound output side priority data of the next higher sound output area is read for the sound output area to be updated, and in step S1805, the sound output side priority data of the output area is read. Then, in step S1806, which of the read sound output side priority data has a higher priority is specified, and in step S1807, the higher priority sound output area is set as an output area. To do.

  Thereafter, in step S1808, it is determined whether or not the sound output side priority data comparison processing has been completed for all the sound output areas to be updated. If a negative determination is made in step S1808, the processing from step S1804 to step S1807 is repeated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1808, the process proceeds to step S1809.

  In step S1809, sound output control is performed on the speaker unit 45 based on data corresponding to the current pointer information in the sound output data stored in the sound output area set in the output area. In this case, in one sound output control process, only one sound output data is subjected to sound output control, and sound output data stored in the other sound output areas to be updated is not subjected to sound output control. That is, the sound output data is set to mute.

  In subsequent step S1810, it is determined whether or not there is sound output data whose pointer information is final pointer information among the sound output data stored in the sound output area to be updated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1810, it is determined in step S1811 whether or not the sound output data that is the final pointer information is base data or notification occurrence data. If it is base data or notification occurrence data, in step S1812, the pointer information of the sound output data, which is the final pointer information, is returned to the start pointer information. By executing the return process, the pointer information of the sound output data that is the return target is repeatedly updated.

  Whether the base data or the notification occurrence data is specified is performed using the sound output side priority data. That is, the sound output side priority data can be used not only for comparison of priorities but also for specifying the type of sound output data.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1811, the sound output data that is the final pointer information is cleared in step S1813, and the sound output in the sound output area in which the sound output data is stored is output. The side priority data clear process is executed. That is, the sound output data other than the base data and the notification occurrence data is cleared by becoming the last pointer information.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1810, when the process of step S1812 is executed, or when the process of step S1813 is executed, the first sound output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186 are changed in step S1814. The pointer information update process is executed for each of the areas to be updated. Thereby, in the next processing time of the sound output control process, the sound output control is executed based on the data corresponding to the new pointer information. However, in the update processing of the pointer information, the sound output data that is the target of the return processing to the start pointer information in step S1812 is not processed, and the sound output data that is waiting to be updated is also included. Not subject to processing.

  After that, in step S1815, it is determined whether or not the sound output data that has reached the output start timing is present in the sound output data that is waiting to be updated. If a negative determination is made in step S1815, the real sound output control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1815, the sound output data at the output start timing is updated in step S1816. After adding the target sound output data, the real sound output control process is terminated.

<Drive control of movable object in sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the contents of drive control of the curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable units 61a and 61b executed by the sound light side MPU 112 will be described.

<Setting process of moving object effect of sound light side MPU 112>
First, the movable object effect setting process in step S1210 in the display-side command handling process (FIG. 22) of the sound light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the setting process, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the command received this time from the display side MPU 122 is a command indicating that the curtain effect should be started. If it is the command, the process advances to step S1902.

  In step S1902, “1” is set to the curtain effect flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114, and “1” is set to the first stage control flag similarly provided in the sound light side RAM 114. The curtain plate effect flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify that execution control of the curtain plate effect using the movable curtain plate 52 is to be performed. The first stage control flag is the first stage operation, the second stage operation, the pair waiting operation, the third stage operation, and the return operation existing as the operation mode of the curtain plate movable object 52 (see FIG. 6), This is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify that execution control of one-step operation is to be performed.

  Thereafter, in step S1903, the type of curtain effect is grasped from the contents of the command received this time. Specifically, the type of curtain effect to be executed this time is grasped among the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect. Then, in accordance with the grasped result, in the subsequent step S1904, flag setting processing corresponding to the type of curtain effect is executed. Specifically, the sound side RAM 114 is provided with a first stage effect flag, a second stage effect flag, and a third stage effect flag. Of these flags, the effect of the effect grasped in step S1903 is provided. Set "1" to the flag corresponding to the type. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1901, it means that the command currently received from the display-side MPU 122 is a command indicating that a disk effect should be started, and thus the process proceeds to step S1905. In step S 1905, “1” is set in the disk effect flag provided in the sound side RAM 114. The disk effect flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify that the execution control of the disk effect using the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is to be performed.

  Thereafter, in step S1906, the types of the disc movable objects 62a and 62b to be executed for the disc effect are grasped from the contents of the command received this time. Specifically, the left single effect using only the left disk movable object 62a, the right single effect using only the right disk movable object 62b, and the synchronous effect using both disk movable objects 62a and 62b. Among them (see FIG. 7), the type of disc effect to be executed this time is grasped. Then, in accordance with the grasped result, in the subsequent step S1907, a flag setting process corresponding to the type of disk effect is executed. Specifically, the sound side RAM 114 is provided with a left single effect flag, a right single effect flag, and a synchronous effect flag. Of these flags, the type of effect grasped in step S1906 is set. Set “1” to the corresponding flag. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

<Moving object control processing of sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the movable object control process of step S507 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the curtain plate effect flag of the sound side RAM 114. If an affirmative determination is made, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not “1” is set in the first stage control flag of the sound light side RAM 114. If the determination is affirmative, the first stage control process is executed in step S2003, and then the movable object control process is terminated.

<First Stage Control Processing of Sound Light Side MPU 112>
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first stage control process.

  In step S2101, it is determined whether or not it is after the start of driving by the first stage control process by checking the flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made, after executing the synchronous drive start process in step S2102, the first stage control process is terminated. In the synchronous drive start processing, each curtain is set so that the pair of left and right slide members 55a and 55b in the curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b move toward the limit position at the same speed, and the movement is started simultaneously. The driving of the plate driving units 56a and 56b is started. Thereby, the first stage operation is started in the movable curtain plate 52, and the lowering is started while maintaining the horizontal state in the movable curtain plate 52.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined in step S2103 whether the curtain plate movable object 52 is on standby. If a negative determination is made, it is determined in step S2104 whether the pair of left and right adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are ON. If a negative determination is made, the first stage control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S2105.

  In step S2105, a synchronous drive stop process is executed. In the synchronous drive stop process, the drive of each curtain plate drive unit 56a, 56b is stopped so that the pair of left and right slide members 55a, 55b are stopped simultaneously. Thereby, the descent while maintaining the horizontal state in the curtain plate movable object 52 is stopped. In a succeeding step S2106, a standby time setting process is executed. In the set process, the standby time data (for example, 4 sec) is set in the counter area of the sound side RAM 114, and the measurement of the standby time is started. Over the waiting time set here, the movable curtain plate 52 stands by at a position where the slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. Thereafter, the first stage control process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2107 whether the standby time has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2107, the first-stage control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the process proceeds to step S2108.

  In step S2108, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first stage effect flag of the sound side RAM 114. If an affirmative determination is made, it means that the current curtain effect is the first stage effect, and therefore, in order to execute the return control process (step S2010) in the next process of the movable object control process, the step In S2109, the first stage control flag is cleared to “0”, and the return control flag provided in the sound side RAM 114 is set to “1”, and then the first stage control process is terminated. The return control flag includes the first stage operation, the second stage operation, the pair waiting operation, the third stage operation, and the return operation that exist as the operation mode of the curtain plate movable object 52 (see FIG. 6). This is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify that execution control is to be performed.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2108, it means that the current curtain effect is a second stage effect or a third stage effect. In this case, in step S2110, the first stage control flag is cleared to “0”, and after setting the second stage control flag provided in the sound side RAM 114 to “1”, the first stage control process is performed. finish. The second stage control flag is the first stage operation, the second stage operation, the pair waiting operation, the third stage operation, and the return operation existing as the operation mode of the curtain plate movable object 52 (see FIG. 6). This is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify that execution control of the two-stage operation is to be performed.

  Returning to the description of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), if a negative determination is made in step S2002, whether or not “1” is set in the second stage control flag of the sound light side RAM 114 in step S2004. Determine whether. If the determination is affirmative, the second-stage control process is executed in step S2005, and then the movable object control process is terminated.

<Second Stage Control Process of Sound Light Side MPU 112>
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the second stage control process.

  In step S2201, it is determined whether or not it is after the start of driving by the second stage control process by checking the flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made, in step S2202, a switching frequency setting process is executed. The setting process is a process for setting the number of times of switching when the curtain plate movable object 52 is alternately tilted left and right in the second stage operation, and specifically, a switching counter provided in the sound light side RAM 114. “4” is set as the data of the number of times of switching.

  In the subsequent step S2203, a drive time setting process is executed. In the set process, the driving time when the curtain plate driving units 56a and 56b to be driven are continuously driven in each tilting operation is set. Specifically, 4 sec, which is the time required for the slide members 55a and 55b arranged at the positions detected by the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b to reach the lower limit position, is set.

  In the subsequent step S2204, a descent start process on the side corresponding to the number of times of switching is executed. Specifically, the drive of the left curtain plate drive unit 56a is started so that the left slide member 55a descends toward the limit position. However, in this case, the right curtain plate driving unit 56b is maintained in a stopped state. Accordingly, only the left side of the curtain plate movable object 52 is lowered, and the curtain plate movable object 52 is inclined downward toward the left side. Thereafter, the second stage control process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the measurement of the drive time set in the sound light side RAM 114 has been completed. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, the second-stage control process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2206. In step S2206, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of switching set in the sound light side RAM 114. In a succeeding step S2207, it is determined whether or not the number of switching after the subtraction is “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2207, in step S2208, the corresponding curtain plate drive unit 56a is arranged so that the slide members 55a and 55b on the lowering completion side rise toward the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. , 56b are controlled. In step S2209, driving of the corresponding curtain plate driving units 56a and 56b is performed so that the slide members 55a and 55b on the opposite side to the processing target in step S2208 are lowered toward the limit position. Control the state. Thereafter, in step S2210, the drive time setting process is executed in the same manner as in step S2203, and then the second stage control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2207, the second stage control flag is cleared to “0” in step S2211, and “1” is set to the pair wait control flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114. After that, the second stage control process is terminated. The pair waiting control flag is a pair waiting among the first stage operation, the second stage operation, the pair waiting operation, the third stage operation, and the return operation existing as the operation mode of the movable curtain 52 (see FIG. 6). This is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify that the operation execution control should be performed.

  Returning to the description of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), if a negative determination is made in step S2004, whether or not “1” is set in the pair wait control flag of the sound light side RAM 114 in step S2006. Determine. If an affirmative determination is made, the movable object control process is terminated after executing the pair wait control process in step S2007.

<Pair Waiting Control Process of Sound Light Side MPU 112>
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the pair wait control process.

  In step S2301, it is determined whether or not it is after the start of driving by the pair wait control process by checking the flag provided in the sound side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made, in step S2302, the return start process is executed for both curtain plate drive units 56a and 56b, and then the pair wait control process ends. In the return start process, each curtain plate drive is arranged such that the pair of left and right slide members 55a and 55b in the curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b move toward the detection positions of the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b at the same speed. The drive of the parts 56a and 56b is started. In the second stage control process, since both slide members 55a and 55b are present below the detection positions of the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b at the end stage, the process of step S2302 is executed. Both of the slide members 55a and 55b will rise.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, it is determined in step S2303 whether any one of the pair of left and right adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2303, the pair wait control process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2304. In step S2304, the curtain plate driving units 56a and 56b on the side corresponding to the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b that were turned on in step S2303 are stopped. In this case, if both the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are ON in step S2303, both the curtain plate driving units 56a and 56b are stopped. Note that when both the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are ON, the movable curtain plate 52 returns to the horizontal state.

  In a succeeding step S2305, it is determined whether or not both of the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the pair wait control process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, the process proceeds to step S2306.

  In step S2306, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the third stage effect flag of the sound side RAM 114. If an affirmative determination is made, a light emission data read process for the third stage effect is executed in step S2307, and a sound output data read process for the third stage effect is executed in step S2308.

  By executing the process of step S2307, the light emission data corresponding to the third stage operation is set in the light emission data reading process (FIG. 28) already described, and then the light emission control process (FIG. 31) is executed. Thus, light emission control is performed in accordance with the light emission pattern corresponding to the third stage operation in accordance with the timing at which the third stage operation is started. In this case, the light emission data has a lower priority than the light emission data for notification and the light emission data for the confirmed effect, but has a higher priority than the other light emission data, and the final effect can be executed. Since the third stage operation is not executed at the timing, basically, the light emission control corresponding to the execution of the third stage operation is executed.

  Further, by executing the process of step S2308, the sound output data corresponding to the third stage operation is set in the sound output data reading process (FIG. 34) already described, and then the sound output control process ( 35) is executed, sound output control is performed with a sound output pattern corresponding to the third-stage operation in accordance with the timing at which the third-stage operation is started. In this case, the sound output data has a lower priority than the sound output data for notification and the sound output data for the confirmed effect, but has a higher priority than the other sound output data. Since the third stage operation is not executed at the timing at which can be executed, basically the sound output control corresponding to the execution of the third stage operation is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S2309, the pair wait control flag is cleared to “0” and the third stage control flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114 is set to “1”, and then the pair wait control process is ended. The third stage control flag is the first stage operation, the second stage operation, the pair waiting operation, the third stage operation, and the return operation existing as the operation mode of the curtain plate movable object 52 (see FIG. 6), This is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify that execution control of the three-stage operation is to be performed.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2306, it means that the current curtain effect was the second stage effect. In this case, in step S2310, the pair wait control flag of the sound light side RAM 114 is cleared to “0”, and the return control flag of the sound light side RAM 114 is set to “1”, and then the pair wait control process ends. .

  Returning to the description of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), if a negative determination is made in step S2006, whether or not “1” is set in the third stage control flag of the sound light side RAM 114 in step S2008. Determine whether. If the determination is affirmative, the third-stage control process is executed in step S2009, and then the movable object control process is terminated.

<Third stage control processing of the sound light side MPU 112>
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the third stage control process.

  In step S2401, it is determined whether or not it is after the start of driving by the third stage control process by checking the flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made, a synchronous drive start process is executed in step S2402. In the synchronous drive start processing, each curtain is set so that the pair of left and right slide members 55a and 55b in the curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b move toward the limit position at the same speed, and the movement is started simultaneously. The driving of the plate driving units 56a and 56b is started. Thereby, the movement toward the limit position is started in the movable curtain plate 52, and the lowering is started while maintaining the horizontal state in the movable curtain plate 52. Thereafter, in step S2403, after executing the synchronous drive time setting process, the third stage control process is terminated. In the setting process, the driving time for continuing the descent of the movable curtain plate 52 while maintaining the horizontal state is set. Specifically, 4 sec, which is the time required for the slide members 55a and 55b arranged at the positions detected by the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b to reach the lower limit position, is set.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, it is a state after the synchronous drive started in step S2402 is stopped by confirming the flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114 in step S2404. It is determined whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S2404, it is subsequently determined in step S2405 whether or not the measurement of the synchronous drive time set in the sound light side RAM 114 has been completed. If a negative determination is made in step S2405, the third stage control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, the process proceeds to step S2406.

  In step S2406, synchronous drive stop processing is executed. In the synchronous drive stop process, the drive of each curtain plate drive unit 56a, 56b is stopped so that the pair of left and right slide members 55a, 55b are stopped simultaneously. Thereby, the descent while maintaining the horizontal state in the curtain plate movable object 52 is stopped. In a succeeding step S2407, a standby time setting process is executed. In the set process, the standby time data (for example, 4 sec) is set in the counter area of the sound side RAM 114, and the measurement of the standby time is started. Over the standby time set here, the movable movable member 52 waits at the limit position of the slide members 55a and 55b. Thereafter, the third stage control process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2404, it is determined in step S2408 whether the standby time has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2408, the third-stage control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2408, the third-stage control flag of the sound side RAM 114 is set to “ After clearing “0” and setting “1” to the return control flag of the sound side RAM 114, the third stage control process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), if a negative determination is made in step S2008, the movable object control process is terminated after the return control process is executed in step S2010.

<Returning control processing of sound light side MPU 112>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the return control process.

  In step S2501, it is determined whether or not it is after the start of driving by the return control process by checking a flag provided in the sound side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made, after executing the synchronous return start process in step S2502, the return control process ends. In the synchronization return start processing, each curtain is set so that the pair of left and right slide members 55a and 55b in the curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b move toward the initial position at the same speed, and the movement is started simultaneously. The driving of the plate driving units 56a and 56b is started. Thereby, the movement toward the initial position of the movable curtain plate 52 is started, and the rising of the movable curtain plate 52 is started while maintaining the horizontal state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, it is determined in step S2503 whether one of the left and right pair of curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2503, the return control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, the curtain plate driving units 56a and 56b on the side corresponding to the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b that were turned on in step S2503 are stopped. In this case, if both curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b are ON in step S2503, both curtain plate drive units 56a and 56b are stopped.

  In a succeeding step S2505, it is determined whether or not both curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b are ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2505, the return control processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, the various control clear processing is executed in step S2506, and then the return control processing is ended. . In the various flag clear processing, the return control flag of the sound light side RAM 114 is cleared to “0”, and the curtain effect flag of the sound light side RAM 114 is cleared to “0”. Further, among the first stage effect flag, the second stage effect flag, and the third stage effect flag in the sound side RAM 114, the flag corresponding to the type of the current curtain effect is cleared to “0”. As a result, the current curtain production ends.

<State of stage 3 production>
Next, how the third stage effect is performed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 43 (a) shows the drive state of the left curtain plate drive unit 56a, FIG. 43 (b) shows the drive state of the right curtain plate drive unit 56b, and FIG. 43 (c) shows the left adjustment position. 43 (d) shows the detection state of the right adjustment position sensor 58b, and FIG. 43 (e) shows the effect on the front side of the third stage operation on the light emission control and sound output control side. The execution status is shown, and FIG. 43 (f) shows the execution status of the production corresponding to the third stage operation on the light emission control and sound output control side. In the following description, the driving state of the curtain plate driving portions 56a and 56b when the slide members 55a and 55b are lowered is referred to as a positive driving state, and the curtain plate when the slide members 55a and 55b are raised. The driving state of the driving units 56a and 56b is referred to as a reverse driving state.

  When the third stage effect is started at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), the drive control is started so that the left curtain plate drive unit 56a is driven in the forward direction. As shown in FIG. 43 (b), drive control is started so that the right curtain plate drive section 56b is in the forward drive state. Thus, the descent of the curtain plate moving object 52 is started while maintaining the horizontal state. In addition, at the timing, as shown in FIG. 43 (e), on the light emission control and sound output control side, the third stage effect, which is the front side of the third stage operation, is started.

  Then, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIGS. 43 (c) and 43 (d), the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are turned on, as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b). At the same time, the curtain plate driving portions 56a and 56b are stopped. As a result, the descent of the movable curtain plate 52 due to the horizontal state is stopped, and the state is maintained until the timing t3.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, while maintaining the right curtain plate driving unit 56b in the stopped state as shown in FIG. 43B, the left curtain plate driving unit as shown in FIG. 43A. 56a is in the forward drive state. As a result, the movable curtain plate 52 is inclined downward toward the left side. Thereafter, at the timings t4, t5, and t6, as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), the left curtain plate drive unit 56a and the right curtain plate drive unit 56b. Switching control is performed so that one of them is driven in the forward direction and the other is driven in the reverse direction. Thereby, the state in which the curtain plate movable object 52 is inclined downward toward the left side and the state inclined downward toward the right side alternately occur. That is, the second stage operation is performed.

  After that, at the timing of t7, the second stage operation is finished, and then the pair wait control is started, so that the left curtain driving as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b). Both the part 56a and the right curtain plate driving part 56b are driven in the reverse direction. Then, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 43 (c), the left adjustment position sensor 58a is turned on, and as shown in FIG. 43 (a), the left curtain plate driving unit 56a is stopped. It becomes a state. Further, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 43 (d), the right adjustment position sensor 58b is turned on, and as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the right curtain plate driving unit 56b is stopped. It becomes a state. As a result, the movable curtain plate 52 becomes horizontal again.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, the third stage operation is started. That is, as shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, both the left curtain plate drive unit 56a and the right curtain plate drive unit 56b are driven in the forward direction. As a result, the curtain plate movable object 52 is lowered toward the limit position while maintaining the horizontal state. Further, at the timing when the third stage operation is started in the curtain plate movable object 52, as shown in FIGS. 43 (e) and 43 (f), the effects so far in the light emission control and the sound output control are finished. The production corresponding to the third stage operation is started. For example, at the timing when the curtain plate movable object 52 starts to descend again, a corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker unit 45, and simultaneous light emission of the same color corresponding thereto is performed in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. Is called.

  Thereafter, when both slide members 55a and 55b reach the limit position at the timing of t11, as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), the left curtain driving unit 56a and the right The curtain plate driving unit 56b is stopped. Thereby, the descent of the curtain plate movable object 52 due to the horizontal state is stopped, and the state is maintained until the timing t12.

  Thereafter, the return operation is started at the timing t12. That is, as shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, both the left curtain body drive unit 56a and the right curtain plate drive unit 56b are driven in opposite directions. As a result, the curtain plate moving object 52 starts to rise while maintaining a horizontal state. In addition, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG.43 (f), the production | presentation corresponding to the 3rd step operation | movement in light emission control and sound output control is complete | finished.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t13, both the slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b, and as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), for the left curtain plate. The drive unit 56a and the right curtain plate drive unit 56b are stopped. Thus, the return of the curtain plate movable object 52 to the initial position in the horizontal state is completed, and the third stage effect ends.

  When the third stage effect is performed as described above, when the curtain plate movable object 52 is lowered in the horizontal state after the second stage operation of alternately tilting the curtain plate movable object 52 is performed, Instead of individually controlling the curtain plate driving portions 56a and 56b with the driving time to determine the start timing of the lowering operation, the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, respectively. On this condition, the moving operation of the curtain plate movable object 52 in the horizontal state is performed. Accordingly, when the curtain plate movable object 52 is lowered, it is easy to ensure the lowering operation in the horizontal state.

  Further, in accordance with the start of the descending operation of the movable curtain 52 in the horizontal state, the speaker unit 45 performs sound output control corresponding thereto and the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 perform light emission control corresponding thereto. The start timing of the sound output control and the light emission control is not configured to be determined by measuring the elapsed time, but the condition is that the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, respectively. In addition, the sound output control and the light emission control are started. As a result, in the configuration in which the sound output control and the light emission control are performed in accordance with the descending operation of the movable curtain plate 52, the start timing of the sound output control and the light emission control is synchronized with the start timing of the downward movement of the movable curtain plate 52. It becomes easy.

  Further, even when the second stage effect is performed, when the curtain plate movable object 52 is lifted in the horizontal state after the second stage operation of alternately tilting the curtain plate movable object 52 is performed, Rather than controlling the curtain plate driving units 56a and 56b individually with the driving time to determine the start timing of the ascending operation, the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b detect the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b. On this condition, the moving operation of the curtain plate movable object 52 in the horizontal state is performed. Thus, when the curtain plate movable object 52 is raised, it is easy to ensure the raising operation in the horizontal state.

  Further, adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are provided on the limit position side of the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b, and whether the curtain plate movable object 52 is in a horizontal state using the detection results of the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. By determining whether or not, when switching to the operation mode in which it is horizontally lowered after the operation mode of alternately inclining, it is not necessary to return the movable curtain plate 52 to the initial position. As a result, the operation mode can be switched at an early stage.

  Returning to the description of the movable object control process (FIG. 37), if a negative determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the disk effect flag in the sound side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made in step S2011, the movable object control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2011, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not “1” is set in the synchronization effect flag of the sound light side RAM 114, and the execution target of the current disk effect is determined. It is determined whether or not both the left disk movable object 62a and the right disk movable object 62b. If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the single control process is executed in step S2013 and then the movable object control process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2012, synchronization is performed in step S2014. After executing the control process, the movable object control process is terminated. Hereinafter, the single control process and the synchronous control process will be described.

<Single control processing of sound light side MPU 112>
First, the single control process of step S2013 in the movable object control process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2601, it is determined whether or not it is after the start of driving by a single control process by checking a flag provided in the sound side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made, a slide start process toward the limit position is executed in step S2602. In the slide start process, driving of the disk slide driving units 66a and 66b on the side corresponding to the flag set to “1” among the left single effect flag and the right single effect flag in the sound side RAM 114 is started. To do. As a result, the movable discs 62a and 62b on the side to be controlled this time start sliding toward the limit position.

  In the subsequent step S2603, a rotation start process is executed. In the rotation start process, driving of the disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b on the side to be controlled this time is started. As a result, rotation in a fixed direction is started in the movable discs 62a and 62b on the side to be controlled this time. Thereafter, the single control process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, a return operation is performed in the movable discs 62a and 62b on the side to be controlled this time by checking the flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114 in step S2604. Determine whether it is done. Note that the flag setting process indicating that the return operation is being performed is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S2610 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined in step S2605 whether or not the disc movable object 62a, 62b on the side to be controlled this time is in the middle of the slide movement toward the limit position. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, step control processing is executed in step S2606.

  Here, stepping motors are used as the disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b. As the stepping motor, the pachinko machine 10 uses a hybrid (HB) type two-phase stepping motor employing a 1-2 phase excitation method. Note that the stepping motor is not limited to a hybrid type or two-phase, and various stepping motors such as a four-phase or five-phase stepping motor can be used. Each of the disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b is configured so that the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b are rotated once by giving a drive signal of a reference pulse (for example, 300 pulses) defined as a plurality of pulses. The rotational positions of the movable discs 62a and 62b can be specified by the number of times the drive signal is output. In step S2606, processing for newly giving a drive signal to the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b on the control target side is executed.

  In a succeeding step S2607, it is determined whether or not the disc movable object 62a, 62b on the side to be controlled this time has reached the limit position. Whether or not the limit position has been reached is determined by determining whether or not the elapsed time from the execution of the slide start process in step S2602 is a time corresponding to reaching the limit position. Done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a configuration including a sensor for detecting that the movable discs 62a and 62b have reached the limit position, the movable discs 62a and 62b are moved by the sensor. It is good also as a structure which determines whether it reached | attained the limit position by determining whether it detected.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2607, the single control process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2607, the process proceeds to step S2608. In step S2608, the drive state of the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b on the side to be controlled this time is stopped. As a result, the sliding movement of the movable discs 62a and 62b on the side that is the current control target is stopped. Thereafter, the single control process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2605, step control processing is executed in step S2609 in the same manner as in step S2606. In a succeeding step S2610, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the stop command flag of the sound light side RAM 114. As described above, when a command corresponding to the stop command for the disk effect is received from the display side MPU 122, “1” is set in the stop command flag in step S1212 of the display side command response process (FIG. 22). . If a negative determination is made in step S2610, the single control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2610, the slide control process for the initial position is executed in step S2611, and then the single control process is terminated. In the slide start process, return drive is started for the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b on the control target side this time. As a result, the disc movable object 62a, 62b on the side that is the current control object starts sliding toward the initial position.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined in step S2612 whether or not the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are rotating. In the case of rotation, in step S2613, step control processing is executed in the same manner as in step S2606. Subsequently, in step S2614, rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b which are the current control target side are executed. It is determined whether or not is ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2614, in step S2615, the drive state of the disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b on the control target side is stopped.

  That is, the rotation of the movable discs 62a and 62b in the disc effect is not stopped immediately even if a stop command is issued from the display-side MPU 122, and is detected after the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b detect the rotation. Stops after reaching the initial position. As a result, the rotational positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b at the end of the disk production at the disk movable objects 62a and 62b can always be the same position, and the disk movable object when starting the disk production. The rotational positions of 62a and 62b can always be the same position.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2612, a negative determination is made in step S2614, or if the process in step S2615 is executed, in step S2616, the slide initial position sensor 68a, It is determined whether 68b is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2616, the single control process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2616, the slide control process is performed in step S2617, and then the single control process is terminated. To do. In the slide stop process, the drive state of the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b on the control target side is stopped.

<A disc production with a single control>
Next, how the disc effect is performed by single control on the left disc movable object 62a will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. In addition, the aspect in the case where the disk effect by single control is performed with respect to the right disk movable object 62b is also basically the same.

  45 (A) and 45 (B) show the state of the disk effect by the single control executed when different pattern data tables are referred to, respectively, and FIG. 45 (a1) and FIG. FIG. 45 (b1) and FIG. 45 (b2) show the rotational position of the disk movable object 62a, and FIG. 45 (c1) and FIG. 45 (c2) show the rotation. FIG. 45 (d1) and FIG. 45 (d2) show the rotation period of the disk movable object 62a.

  First, the case of FIG. 45A will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a1), by receiving a command indicating that a disk effect should be started from the display side MPU 122 at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 45 (b1) and FIG. 45 (d1). The rotation of the disk movable object 62a is started. Further, in this case, although explanation by illustration is omitted, the slide movement toward the limit position is started in the disc movable object 62a.

  Thereafter, at each of the timing t2, the timing t3, and the timing t4, as shown in FIGS. 45 (b1) and 45 (c1), the disk movable object 62a makes one round, and the rotation initial position sensor 69a It becomes ON state at the timing. In addition, since the disk movable object 62a has reached the limit position by the timing of t4, the slide movement of the disk movable object 62a is stopped.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 45 (a1), a command indicating that the disk effect should be stopped is received from the display side MPU 122. In this case, although description by illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the slide movement toward the initial position in the disk movable object 62a is started. On the other hand, at the timing, the rotation position of the disk movable object 62a is not the rotation initial position, so the rotation is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIGS. 45 (b1) and 45 (c1), the disk movable object 62a makes one turn and the rotation initial position sensor 69a is turned on, so that the disk movable object 62a is turned on. The rotation is stopped. In this case, although description by illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the slide movement toward the initial position of the disk movable object 62a is completed by the timing of t6. That is, in the case of FIG. 45A, the rotation of the movable disk 62a is stopped after the slide movement toward the initial position of the movable disk 62a is completed. In the case of FIG. 45 (A), as shown in FIG. 45 (d1), the disk movable object 62a rotates from the timing t1 to the timing t6.

  Next, the case of FIG. 45B will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a2), by receiving a command indicating that the disk effect should be started from the display side MPU 122 at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 45 (b2) and FIG. 45 (d2). The rotation of the disk movable object 62a is started. Further, in this case, although explanation by illustration is omitted, the slide movement toward the limit position is started in the disc movable object 62a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 45 (b2) and 45 (c2), at the timing t12 and the timing t13, the disk movable object 62a makes one turn, and the rotation initial position sensor 69a is turned on at each timing. It becomes a state. In addition, since the disk movable object 62a has reached the limit position by the timing of t3, the slide movement of the disk movable object 62a is stopped.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 45 (a2), a command indicating that the disk effect should be stopped is received from the display side MPU 122. In this case, although description by illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the slide movement toward the initial position in the disk movable object 62a is started. On the other hand, at the timing, the rotation position of the disk movable object 62a is not the rotation initial position, so the rotation is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 45 (b2) and FIG. 45 (c2), the disk movable object 62a makes one turn and the rotation initial position sensor 69a is turned on, so that the disk movable object 62a The rotation is stopped. In this case, although description by illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the slide movement toward the initial position of the disk movable object 62a is not completed by the timing of t15. That is, in the case of FIG. 45B, the slide movement toward the initial position of the movable disk 62a is completed after the rotation of the movable disk 62a is stopped. In the case of FIG. 45 (B), as shown in FIG. 45 (d2), the disk movable object 62a rotates from the timing t11 to the timing t15. This rotation period is shorter than in the case of FIG.

  As described above, when the disk effect is executed, the rotation operation of each of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped by being detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b. As a result, when the rotational movement of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped, it is possible to always stop the movable object 62a and 62b in the state of being arranged at the initial rotation position. It becomes possible to make the aspect of the rotation position of the animals 62a and 62b constant. In addition, the rotational positions of the disc movable objects 62a and 62b at the start of the rotation of the disc effect can be made constant.

  Similarly, when the disk effect is executed, the slide operation of each of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped by being detected by the slide initial position sensors 68a and 68b. As a result, when the sliding movement of the disc movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped, it is possible to always stop the disc moving object 62a and 62b at the initial slide position. It becomes possible to make the aspect of the slide position of the animals 62a and 62b constant. In addition, the slide positions of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b at the start of the rotation of the disk effect can be made constant.

  In the case where the rotation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped on the condition that the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are detected as described above, the display side MPU 122 displays the disk effect when the disk effect is executed. It is only necessary to transmit a command indicating that the start should be started and a command indicating that the disk effect should be stopped according to the data defined in the pattern data table, and the display side MPU 122 and the sound light side MPU 112 may perform the disk effect. Even if the execution period is not managed, it is possible to make the rotation position and slide position of the disc movable objects 62a and 62b constant at the end of the disc effect. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the design of the processing configuration for executing the disc effect at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the design stage, the rotation period of the movable discs 62a and 62b can be varied by merely adjusting the command transmission timing indicating that the disc presentation should be stopped in relation to the rotation period of the movable discs 62a and 62b. Can be achieved.

<Synchronous control processing of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
Next, the synchronization control process of step S2014 in the movable object control process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2701, it is determined whether or not it is after the start of driving by the synchronization control process by checking the flag provided in the sound side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made, a left slide start process toward the limit position is executed in step S2702, and a right slide start process toward the limit position is executed in step S2703. In each of these slide start processes, the drive of the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b on the side to be controlled is started. As a result, the pair of left and right disc movable objects 62a and 62b starts sliding movement toward the limit position at the same speed, and the sliding movement is simultaneously started.

  Thereafter, the left rotation start process is executed in step S2704, and the right rotation start process is executed in step S2705. In each of these rotation start processes, driving of the disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b on the side to be controlled is started. As a result, the pair of left and right disc movable objects 62a and 62b start rotating at the same speed, and the rotation is simultaneously started. Thereafter, this synchronization control process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not a return operation has been performed on each of the movable discs 62a and 62b by checking a flag provided in the sound-side RAM 114. judge. Note that the flag setting process indicating that the return operation is being performed is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S2715 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2706, it is determined in step S2707 whether or not each disc movable object 62a, 62b is in the middle of a sliding movement toward the limit position. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2707, the left step control process is executed and the left step number update process is executed in step S2708. In step S2709, right-side step control processing is executed, and right-side step number update processing is executed.

  In each step control process, a process for newly giving a drive signal to the corresponding disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b is executed, and the number of steps of the disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b is advanced. In this case, the data that defines the correspondence between the output pattern of the drive signal in each processing step of the step control process and the excitation pattern of the disk rotation drive units 67a and 67b is the movable object data group 153 in the sound light side ROM 113. Is predetermined. The data for defining the correspondence relationship includes data for an acceleration period necessary for rotating the disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b at a constant speed and data for a constant speed period after the acceleration period. ing. As for the data of the acceleration period, there is data on the correspondence relationship between the output pattern of the drive signal and the excitation pattern for the entire acceleration period. On the other hand, as for the data of the constant speed period, there is only correspondence data between the output pattern of the drive signal and the excitation pattern for a part of the constant speed period. It will be used repeatedly. However, the data of the constant speed period may be configured such that data on the correspondence relationship between the output pattern of the drive signal and the excitation pattern exists for the entire constant speed period. In the said structure, it is preferable that the data of the said constant speed period exist for the period more than the longest time which can be assumed as a disk production.

  Here, in the movable object data area 164 of the sound side RAM 114, the left step number area for managing the number of steps of the left disk rotation driving unit 67a and the number of steps of the right disk rotation driving unit 67b are shown. A right step number area for management is provided. As described above, each of the disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b is configured to rotate once by applying a driving signal of a reference pulse determined as a plurality of pulses, and 1 by supplying one driving signal. It is the composition which advances step. The numerical information in each step number area is incremented by 1 each time a driving signal is given to the corresponding disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b, and is cleared to "0" when the numerical information corresponds to the reference pulse. It has become. The sound light side MPU 112 can grasp the rotational positions of the corresponding disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b by confirming the numerical information of each step number area. In addition, when the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, the numerical information in the corresponding step number area may be cleared to “0”.

  In a succeeding step S2710, it is determined whether or not both of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b have reached the limit position. Whether or not the limit position has been reached is determined by determining whether or not the elapsed time from the execution of the slide start process in steps S2702 and S2703 corresponds to the arrival of the limit position. It is done by doing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a configuration including a sensor for detecting that the movable discs 62a and 62b have reached the limit position, the movable discs 62a and 62b are moved by the sensor. It is good also as a structure which determines whether it reached | attained the limit position by determining whether it detected.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2710, the synchronization control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2710, the processes of steps S2711 and S2712 are performed, and then the synchronization control process is terminated. . In step S2711, the drive state of the left disk slide drive unit 66a is stopped, and in step S2712, the drive state of the right disk slide drive unit 66b is stopped. Thereby, the sliding movement of the pair of left and right disc movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2707, the left-side step control process is executed and the left-side step number update process is executed in step S2713 as in the case of step S2708. In step S2714, as in the case of step S2709, the right step control process is executed and the right step number update process is executed.

  In a succeeding step S2715, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the stop command flag of the sound side RAM 114. As described above, when a command corresponding to the stop command for the disk effect is received from the display side MPU 122, “1” is set in the stop command flag in step S1212 of the display side command response process (FIG. 22). . If a negative determination is made in step S2715, the synchronization control process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2715, a left slide start process toward the initial position is executed in step S2716, and a right slide start process toward the initial position is executed in step S2717. . In these slide start processes, return drive is started for the corresponding disk slide drive units 66a and 66b. As a result, the pair of left and right disc movable objects 62a and 62b starts sliding movement toward the initial position at the same speed, and the sliding movement is simultaneously started. Then, after executing the rotation stop adjustment process in step S2718, the synchronization control process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, the return control process is executed in step S2719, and then the synchronization control process ends.

  Hereinafter, the adjustment process for stopping rotation in step S2718 and the return process in step S2719 will be described.

<Adjustment process for stopping rotation of sound-side MPU 112>
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the rotation stop adjustment process in step S2718 in the synchronization control process (FIG. 46).

  First, in step S2801, by confirming the left step number area and the right step number area in the movable object data area 164 of the sound side RAM 114, either one of the pair of left and right disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b is stepped. It is determined whether or not the number is included in the limit range. If a negative determination is made in step S2801, the adjustment process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the process proceeds to step S2802. In step S2802, “1” is set to the stop restriction flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114, and in step S2803, the stop cancellation determination area provided in the movable object data area 164 of the sound light side RAM 114 is set. After setting the number of steps for determining stop cancellation, this adjustment process is terminated.

  Here, the limit range is a case where the movable discs 62a and 62b are rotated by the number of steps for the stop release determination or more even when the command corresponding to the stop command for the disc effect is received from the display side MPU 122. Is a range that serves as a reference when determining whether or not to execute processing that does not stop the rotation even if the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b. The number of steps including the number of steps corresponding to the detection range of 69b is set. Specifically, the limit range is set so as to include the entire range of the number of steps corresponding to the detection range and to be wider in both the forward direction and the reverse direction than the range of the number of steps. Yes. More specifically, the limit range is preferably ± 20%, more preferably ± 10%, and more preferably ± 5% of the maximum number of steps with respect to the number of steps at the rotation initial position. Is particularly preferred. In the pachinko machine 10, the limit range is set as ± 5% (± 15 steps) of the maximum number of steps (300 steps) with respect to the number of steps at the rotation initial position.

  The number of steps for determination of stop release is the number of steps for ensuring that the rotational position of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is far from the initial rotation position, and the number of steps equal to or greater than the number of steps included in the detection range. It is defined as a number. More specifically, it is determined as the number of steps equal to or greater than the number of steps included in the limit range. Specifically, the number of steps is determined as 150 steps in order to obtain a position rotated by 180 ° with respect to the initial rotation position. ing. Then, as will be described later, as the disk movable objects 62a and 62b rotate by the number of steps for determination of stop cancellation, the stop limit flag is cleared to “0”, and the monitoring of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b is resumed. .

<Return processing of the sound light side MPU 112>
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the return processing in step S2719 in the synchronization control processing (FIG. 46).

  First, in step S2901, it is determined whether the left slide initial position sensor 68a is ON. If it is ON, in step S2902, the driving state of the left disk slide drive unit 66a is determined. Stop. Thereby, the sliding movement toward the initial position of the left disk movable object 62a is stopped.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2901, or if the process of step S2902 is executed, it is determined in step S2903 whether the right slide initial position sensor 68b is ON. If it is ON, in step S2904, the drive state of the right disk slide drive unit 66b is stopped. Thereby, the slide movement toward the initial position of the right disk movable object 62b is stopped.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2903, or if the process of step S2904 is executed, it is determined in step S2905 whether at least one of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is rotating. If a negative determination is made in step S2905, the return processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2905, the process proceeds to step S2906.

  In step S2906, as in the case of step S2708, the left step control process is executed and the left step number update process is executed. In step S2907, as in the case of step S2709, the right step control process is executed and the right step number update process is executed.

  In a succeeding step S2908, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the stop restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 114. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2908, a left-side step number area and a right-side step number area in the movable object data area 164 of the sound light side RAM 114 are confirmed in step S2909. While grasping the current number of steps 62a and 62b and confirming the stop release determination area in the movable object data area 164, the number of steps for stop release determination is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the current number of steps of both the disk movable objects 62a and 62b has reached the number of steps for determination of stop release. If a negative determination is made in step S2909, the main return processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2909, the stop restriction flag is cleared to “0” in step S2910, and then the main recovery processing is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2908, that is, if “1” is not set in the stop restriction flag, the rotation stop process is executed in step S2911, and then the return process is terminated.

  In the rotation stopping process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 49, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the left rotation initial position sensor 69a is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S3001, the left initial position counter provided in the movable object data area 164 of the sound light side RAM 114 is cleared to “0” in step S3002. The left initial position counter is a counter for measuring the number of times that the left rotation initial position sensor 69a has been confirmed to be ON.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3001, the numerical information of the left initial position counter is incremented by 1 in step S3003, and the numerical information of the left initial position counter becomes 2 or more in step S3004. It is determined whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3004, the drive state of the left disk rotation drive unit 67a is stopped in step S3005. Thereby, the rotation of the left disk movable object 62a is stopped.

  If the process of step S3002 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S3004, or if the process of step S3005 is executed, whether or not the right rotation initial position sensor 69b is ON in step S3006. Determine whether. If a negative determination is made in step S3006, the right-side initial position counter provided in the movable object data area 164 of the sound light side RAM 114 is cleared to “0” in step S3007, and then this rotation stop processing is performed. finish. The right initial position counter is a counter for measuring the number of times that the right rotation initial position sensor 69b has been confirmed to be ON.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3006, the numerical information of the right initial position counter is incremented by 1 in step S3008, and the numerical information of the right initial position counter becomes 2 or more in step S3009. It is determined whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S3009, the rotation stop processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3009, the drive state of the right disk rotation drive unit 67b is stopped in step S3010, and then the rotation stop process is terminated. As a result, the rotation of the right disk movable object 62b is stopped.

<Operation by executing adjustment processing for stopping rotation>
Next, the effect of executing the adjustment process for stopping rotation (FIG. 47) and the process associated therewith as described above will be described.

  First, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 50, a problem when the adjustment process for stopping rotation and the process associated therewith are not executed will be described.

  FIG. 50A shows the reception status of commands from the display-side MPU 122, FIG. 50B shows the rotational position of the left disk movable object 62a, and FIG. 50C shows the left rotation initial position sensor 69a. FIG. 50D shows the rotation period of the left disk movable object 62a, FIG. 50E shows the rotation position of the right disk movable object 62b, and FIG. 50F shows the right rotation. The detection status of the initial position sensor 69b is shown, and FIG. 50 (g) shows the rotation period of the right disk movable object 62b.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (a), by receiving a command indicating that a disk effect by synchronous control should be started from the display side MPU 122 at the timing of t1, FIG. 50 (b) and FIG. 50 (d) As shown, rotation of the left disk movable object 62a is started, and rotation of the right disk movable object 62b is started as shown in FIGS. 50 (e) and 50 (g). In addition, in this case, although explanation by illustration is omitted, the slide movement toward the limit position is started in the pair of left and right disc movable objects 62a and 62b.

  Thereafter, at the timing t2, the timing t3, and the timing t4, as shown in FIGS. 50 (b) and 50 (c), the left disk movable object 62a makes one turn, and the left rotation initial position. While the sensor 69a is turned on at each timing, as shown in FIGS. 50 (e) and 50 (f), the right disk movable object 62a makes one turn and the right rotation initial position sensor 69b is turned on. Turns ON at timing. In addition, since the disk movable objects 62a and 62b have reached the limit position by the timing of t4, the sliding movement of these disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped.

  Thereafter, at the timing t5 immediately after the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 50A, a command indicating that the disk effect should be stopped is received from the display-side MPU 122. In this case, the timing of t5 is the timing at which the respective disk movable objects 62a and 62b pass through the initial rotation position.

  Here, from the viewpoint of reducing the monitoring processing load, the detection of the detection results from the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b in the sound light side MPU 112 has received a command indicating that the disk effect should be stopped from the display side MPU 122. Will be started later. The sound light side MPU 112 monitors the detection result from the left rotation initial position sensor 69b after monitoring the detection result from the left rotation initial position sensor 69a. Then, as shown in FIGS. 50 (b) and 50 (e), depending on the timing of receiving the stop command from the display side MPU 122, the rotation of the left disk movable object 62a is immediately stopped, There may occur a situation in which the rotation of the right disk movable object 62b is stopped after one round. In this case, in spite of the disc effect by the synchronous control process, there is a possibility that the rotation periods of the left and right disc movable objects 62a and 62b are different from each other unintentionally in designing the pachinko machine 10. That is, as shown in FIGS. 50 (d) and 50 (g), the left disk movable object 62a rotates from the timing t1 to the timing t5, while the right disk movable object 62b Longer than the timing of t1 to the timing of t6, the stop timing is not synchronized.

  Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 51, description will be given of the disk effect by the synchronous control process when the adjustment process for stopping the rotation and the process accompanying it are executed.

  FIG. 51A shows the status of command reception from the display-side MPU 122, FIG. 51B shows the rotational position of the left disk movable object 62a, and FIG. 51C shows the left rotation initial position sensor 69a. FIG. 51 (d) shows the left limit range, FIG. 51 (e) shows the rotation position of the right disk movable object 62b, and FIG. 51 (f) shows the right rotation initial position sensor 69b. FIG. 51 (g) shows the limit range on the right side, and FIG. 51 (h) shows the state of the stop limit flag.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (a), by receiving a command indicating that a disk effect by synchronous control is to be started from the display side MPU 122 at the timing of t1, the left disk as shown in FIG. 51 (b). The rotation of the movable object 62a is started, and the rotation of the right disk movable object 62b is started as shown in FIG. 51 (e). In addition, in this case, although explanation by illustration is omitted, the slide movement toward the limit position is started in the pair of left and right disc movable objects 62a and 62b.

  Thereafter, at the timing t2, the timing t3, and the timing t4, as shown in FIGS. 51 (b) and 51 (c), the left disk movable object 62a makes one turn, and the left rotation initial position. While the sensor 69a is turned on at each timing, as shown in FIGS. 51 (e) and 51 (f), the right disk movable object 62b makes one turn and the right rotation initial position sensor 69b is turned on. Turns ON at timing. In addition, since the disk movable objects 62a and 62b have reached the limit position by the timing of t3, the slide movement of these disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped.

  In this case, a command indicating that the disk effect should be stopped is received from the display-side MPU 122 as shown in FIG. 51A at the timing t4 which is the timing immediately before the timing t5. In this case, the timing of t4 is not the timing at which the movable discs 62a and 62b pass through the initial rotation position as shown in FIGS. 51 (c) and 51 (f). As shown in d) and FIG. 51 (g), this corresponds to the limit range of each movable disk 62a, 62b.

  Here, the operation contents when the stop command is received in the limit range and the limit range will be described again with reference to FIG. 52 (a1) and 52 (a2) are schematic views showing the left disk movable object 62a, and FIGS. 52 (b1) and 52 (b2) are schematic views showing the right disk movable object 62b.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 (a1) and 52 (b1), the limit range Y includes all the number of steps corresponding to the detection range X of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b and is more positive than the range of the number of steps. It is set so as to be wide by a predetermined number of steps with respect to both the side and the reverse direction side. Specifically, the limit range Y is set as ± 5% (± 15 steps) of the maximum number of steps (300 steps) with respect to the number of steps at the rotation initial position.

  When any of the movable discs 62a and 62b is present at the rotational position of the number of steps included in the limit range, when a command corresponding to the stop command is received from the display-side MPU 122, a step for determining the stop release Monitoring of the detection results from the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b is not executed for several minutes or more. That is, until the movable disk objects 62a and 62b are rotated by the number of steps for determining the stop release or more, even if the movable disk objects 62a and 62b are detected by the initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b, the rotation is not stopped. The number of steps for determining stop cancellation is determined as the number of steps equal to or greater than the number of steps included in the limit range. Specifically, 150 is set to be a position rotated 180 ° with respect to the initial rotation position. It is defined in the step. Accordingly, when a command corresponding to the stop command is received from the display-side MPU 122 in a situation where any one of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b exists at the rotational position of the number of steps included in the limit range, FIG. ) And the stop control of the movable discs 62a and 62b are restricted until the rotational position shown in FIG. 52 (b2) is reached.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 51, when a command corresponding to the stop command is received from the display-side MPU 122 at the timing t4 which is the timing included in the left limit range and the right limit range, as shown in FIG. The stop restriction flag is set to “1” at the timing of t4. Since the state where the stop restriction flag is set is maintained until the timing t6, as shown in FIGS. 51 (c) and 51 (f), the rotation initial position sensors 69a, Even if 69b is ON, the movable discs 62a and 62b are not stopped.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 51 (b) and FIG. 51 (e), the left and right disc movable objects 62a and 62b advance in the rotation direction by the number of steps for stop release determination, thereby limiting the stop. The flag is cleared to “0”. Then, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIGS. 51 (c) and 51 (f), each rotation initial position sensor 69a, 69b is turned on, so that FIGS. 51 (b) and 51 (e). As shown, each disk movable object 62a, 62b is stopped simultaneously.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Since the rotating operation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped after being detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, the mode when the rotation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped, the mode when not rotating, and the time when rotation starts. It becomes possible to unify aspects. The control modes for operating the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are start control, stop command flag setting control, and stop control when detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b after the stop command flag is set. Therefore, the process can be simplified when the operation periods of the movable discs 62a and 62b are diversified.

  By adjusting the setting timing of the stop command flag in relation to the timing at which the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, the number of rounds of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b can be adjusted. It is. That is, only by adjusting the setting timing of the stop command flag, it is possible to diversify the number of rotations of the movable discs 62a and 62b while enabling the rotation to be stopped after being detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b. Become.

  By adjusting the setting timing of the stop command flag in relation to the timing at which the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, the rotation stop timing of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is adjusted to the slide stop timing. Can be moved back and forth. That is, it is possible to diversify the operation modes of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b only by adjusting the setting timing of the stop command flag.

  When the stop command flag is set to “1” when the number of steps of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is included in the limit range, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b detect the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b. Even if it is done, the said disk movable object 62a, 62b is not stopped. As a result, if the stop control of the respective disc movable objects 62a and 62b is executed, the disc movable objects 62a and 62b can be stopped in a situation where the respective disc movable objects 62a and 62b cannot be stopped synchronously. It becomes possible to avoid the stop of 62b, and it becomes easy to stop each disk movable object 62a, 62b in the synchronized state.

  In the configuration in which the disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b for driving the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are stepping motors, the rotational positions of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are grasped using the number of steps of the stepping motor. Thereby, simplification of the process structure for grasping | ascertaining the rotational position of each disc movable body 62a, 62b is achieved.

  When the stop command flag is set in a situation where the disc movable objects 62a and 62b are detected by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, or when the stop command flag is set, immediately after the stop command flag is set, the discs can be rotated When the animals 62a and 62b are detected, if an attempt is made to stop each of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b, only one of the movable disk objects 62a stops and the other movable disk object 62b continues to rotate. Can occur. On the other hand, when the stop command flag is set in such a situation, the stopping of the respective disc movable objects 62a and 62b is restricted. Therefore, the respective disc movable objects 62a and 62b are stopped in a synchronized state. It becomes easy.

  Even if the stopping of each movable disk 62a, 62b is restricted, it is within the range of one turn, so that the rotation period of each movable disk 62a, 62b is not prolonged longer than necessary. It is possible to achieve excellent effects as already described.

  By not performing the monitoring process of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, the stop of the respective disk movable objects 62a and 62b is limited. In this case, the restriction is released when the number of steps of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b becomes the number of steps for stop release determination. Thereby, simplification of the processing configuration for grasping the rotational position of each disc movable object 62a, 62b and the processing configuration for releasing the restriction of the stop of each disc movable object 62a, 62b is achieved.

  When the third stage effect is performed as the curtain plate effect, the curtain plate movable object 52 is lowered in the horizontal state after the second stage operation for alternately tilting the curtain plate movable object 52 is performed. Instead of individually controlling the curtain plate driving portions 56a and 56b with the driving time to determine the start timing of the lowering operation, the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, respectively. On this condition, the moving operation of the curtain plate movable object 52 in the horizontal state is performed. Accordingly, when the curtain plate movable object 52 is lowered, it is easy to ensure the lowering operation in the horizontal state.

  Further, in accordance with the start of the descending operation of the movable curtain 52 in the horizontal state, the speaker unit 45 performs sound output control corresponding thereto and the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 perform light emission control corresponding thereto. The start timing of the sound output control and the light emission control is not configured to be determined by measuring the elapsed time, but the condition is that the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, respectively. In addition, the sound output control and the light emission control are started. As a result, in the configuration in which the sound output control and the light emission control are performed in accordance with the descending operation of the movable curtain plate 52, the start timing of the sound output control and the light emission control is synchronized with the start timing of the downward movement of the movable curtain plate 52. It becomes easy.

  Further, even when the second stage effect is performed, when the curtain plate movable object 52 is lifted in the horizontal state after the second stage operation of alternately tilting the curtain plate movable object 52 is performed, Rather than controlling the curtain plate driving units 56a and 56b individually with the driving time to determine the start timing of the ascending operation, the pair of adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b detect the corresponding slide members 55a and 55b. On this condition, the moving operation of the curtain plate movable object 52 in the horizontal state is performed. Thus, when the curtain plate movable object 52 is raised, it is easy to ensure the raising operation in the horizontal state.

  Further, adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are provided on the limit position side of the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b, and whether the curtain plate movable object 52 is in a horizontal state using the detection results of the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. By determining whether or not, when switching to the operation mode in which it is horizontally lowered after the operation mode of alternately inclining, it is not necessary to return the movable curtain plate 52 to the initial position. As a result, the operation mode can be switched at an early stage.

  The sound light side MPU 112 controls execution of effects in the various light emitting units 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 based on a command transmitted from the display side MPU 122, and the display side MPU 122 is based on a command transmitted from the sound light side MPU 112. The execution of the effect in the display device 31 is controlled. Thereby, when producing effects in the same period in each of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the speaker unit 45, and the symbol display device 31, it is difficult for deviations to occur in each effect. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform an effect using a plurality of types of effect means.

  In particular, when the main MPU 92 is used as a reference, the sound light side MPU 112 transmits a command to the sound light side MPU 112 even though the sound light side MPU 112 exists upstream of the communication with respect to the display side MPU 122. It is possible to prevent the production of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the speaker unit 45, and the design display device 31 from being shifted. It becomes.

  In the configuration in which when the production operation device 48 is operated, the production corresponding to that is executed by each of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the speaker unit 45, and the symbol display device 31, the display side MPU 122 is the sound light side MPU 112. After transmitting the operation generation command, the symbol display device 31 performs an operation corresponding operation. In addition, the sound side MPU 112 transmits various operation light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 after the display side MPU 122 transmits the operation effect command. In addition, the speaker unit 45 performs an operation corresponding effect. Thus, in the configuration in which the signal indicating whether or not the effect operating device 48 is operated is input to the sound light side MPU 112, the sound light side MPU 112 waits for the display side MPU 122 to transmit the operation effect command and then responds to the operation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviations in the operations corresponding to the operations.

  Note that the processing load of the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 and the light emission control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is lower than the display control of the symbol display device 31. In this case, a signal from the effect operating device 48 is input to the sound light side MPU 112. Thereby, it is not necessary to monitor the effect operating device 48 in the display side MPU 122 on the relatively high processing load, and the processing load on the display side MPU 122 is reduced.

  The sound light side MPU 112 only needs to start monitoring whether or not the presentation operation device 48 has been operated when the display side MPU 122 transmits an operation valid start command. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 112 independently determines the start timing of the monitoring. There is no need to specify. As a result, the processing load on the sound light side MPU 112 can be reduced in a configuration in which it is difficult for deviations to occur in operations-related effects. Moreover, since the main body which determines the start timing of the various processes in the sound light side MPU 112 is collected by the display side MPU 122, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Whether or not the operation of the effect operation device 48 is during the effective period is determined not only by the sound light side MPU 112 but also by the display side MPU 122. Thereby, although the operation with respect to the production | presentation operation apparatus 48 is not performed during an effective period, possibility that the production | generation corresponding to operation will be performed is reduced.

  When the sound light side MPU 112 receives an operation valid command from the display side MPU 122, it transmits an execution permission command to the display side MPU 122. Then, the display side MPU 122 starts the operation effect by receiving the execution permission command. As a result, the display side MPU 122 can start the operation effect after confirming that the operation valid command has been normally received by the sound light side MPU 112.

  The sound light side MPU 112 may perform the execution control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 according to the performance execution timing determined by the display side MPU 122. There is no need to specify. As a result, in a configuration that makes it difficult for deviations to occur in each effect, the processing load can be reduced compared to the case where the execution timing of the effect can be uniquely specified in each of the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122. It is done.

  The sound light side MPU 112 not only follows the execution timing of the effect determined in the display side MPU 122 but also the content of the effect to be executed may follow the content determined in the display side MPU 122. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration for determining the contents.

  In the configuration in which the execution timing of the effect is specified by the sound light side MPU 112 according to the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122, the display side MPU 122 does not transmit the command every time the control execution timing is reached, but performs predetermined control. Since the command is transmitted when the execution timing comes, the command transmission frequency in the display-side MPU 122 can be reduced. Thereby, the processing load of the display side MPU 122 can be reduced.

  The table MPU 122 reads out the table data corresponding to the entire effect executed in the game times and the opening / closing execution mode. On the other hand, in the sound light side MPU 112, the table data corresponding to the whole is not read, and during the period according to the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122 at each timing in the game times and the opening / closing execution mode. The control data for a part of the effect to be executed is read out. As a result, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity necessary for reading out the control data, compared to a configuration in which the control data corresponding to the whole is read out by each of the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122.

  In particular, since the display side MPU 122 on the display control side of the symbol display device 31 reads table data corresponding to the whole of the effects executed in the game times and the opening / closing execution mode, even if some communication abnormality occurs It becomes possible to continue updating the display on the symbol display device 31. Since the effect on the symbol display device 31 is easily noticed by the player, the updating of the display on the symbol display device 31 is continued, so that the influence when a communication abnormality occurs is reduced.

  The series of effects in the game times and the opening / closing execution mode may include a plurality of effects ranges with different effects, and the part of the control data is set corresponding to the plurality of effects ranges. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the control data unit from becoming too fine, and it is possible to moderately reduce the frequency of reading control data in the sound light side MPU 112.

  The display-side MPU 122 can perform execution control of a series of effects in game times and opening / closing execution modes by referring to the data table at each control execution timing, and also can transmit a command to the sound-side MPU 112. It is possible to specify. Therefore, information to be referred to in the display-side MPU 122 is collected, and the processing load is reduced.

  In the configuration in which the sound light side MPU 112 exists on the upstream side of the communication with respect to the main side MPU 92 with respect to the display side MPU 122, and the execution contents of these effects are determined in the sound light side MPU 112 at the start of the game times and the opening / closing execution mode. Since the display-side MPU 122 reads the data table corresponding to the entire effects executed in the game times and the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to achieve a distributed processing load.

  In the configuration in which the start timing of the game times and opening / closing execution mode effects is specified in the sound light side MPU 112, the sound light side MPU 112 waits for the display side MPU 122 to transmit a command, and then the effects corresponding to these series effects are performed. Since it is the structure made to start with the various light emission part groups 71-73 and the speaker part 45, it becomes possible to suppress that a shift | offset | difference arises in the start timing of an effect.

  While waiting for a command to be transmitted from the display-side MPU 122 at the start of a game play or a series of effects in the opening / closing execution mode, it waits until a command is transmitted from the display-side MPU 122 when an abnormality occurs. The sound light side MPU 112 starts the notification independently. As a result, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122, notification is made in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45. Can be started.

  In the configuration in which the display-side MPU 122 reads out the data table corresponding to the whole of the effects executed in the game round, the sound-side MPU 112 has information on the game results (whether it is a jackpot result, The result type information) is stored and retained. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the execution control of the effect is performed in accordance with the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122 in the sound light side MPU 112, the game result can be taken into consideration in the execution control of the effect.

  Since the display-side MPU 122 only has to transmit the command to the sound-light-side MPU 112 without taking into account the game result information, the configuration for transmitting the command can be optimized. In addition, the sound light side MPU 112 stores and holds information on the game result, and after determining whether or not the content of the effect executed in response to the command transmitted by the display side MPU 122 corresponds to the game result. In order to perform the execution control of the effect, when the configuration for transmitting the command to the display side MPU 122 is optimized as described above, the sound execution side MPU 112 may perform the execution control of the effect corresponding to the game result. It becomes possible.

  When a confirmed effect is performed on the symbol display device 31, the sound light side MPU 112 executes an effect corresponding to the content of the confirmed effect regardless of whether or not the content of the confirmed effect corresponds to the game result. Control is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to prioritize that the contents of the effects match among the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the speaker unit 45, and the symbol display device 31, and it is possible to make it difficult for the effects to be shifted.

  The sound light side MPU 112 can read out the control data corresponding to the effects at different start timings during the game round from one command transmitted by the display side MPU 122. As a result, the command transmission frequency in the display side MPU 122 can be suppressed.

  The sound light side MPU 112 can derive a plurality of light emission data for controlling light emission of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in a predetermined period by applying different start position numbers and durations to the pallet data. It is. Thereby, compared with a configuration in which light emission data different for each type of effect executed in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is stored in the sound light side ROM 113 at the manufacturing stage of the pachinko machine 10, the necessary memory in the sound light side ROM 113 is stored. The capacity can be reduced.

  Since the light emission data is derived by applying at least the start position number and the duration time to the palette data, the light emission data derived from one palette data can be diversified. In this case, a data selection table 151g that defines the correspondence between the pallet data to be used, the type of start position number applied to the pallet data, and the type of duration is stored in advance in the sound side ROM 113. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process for specifying the correspondence between the pallet data and the parameter data applied thereto.

  A plurality of palette data are stored, and a plurality of start position numbers are also stored. Thereby, diversification of the light emission data can be realized while suppressing the storage capacity required in the sound light side ROM 113. In this case, start position data that defines the correspondence between the pallet data and the start position number is stored in advance. Thereby, simplification of the process for specifying the correspondence between the pallet data and the start position number is achieved.

  In the pallet data, the contents of the emission color of the switching destination when the emission colors of the LEDs 71a to 73a are sequentially switched are determined, and the start position number applied to the pallet data is determined in the pallet data. This is a parameter indicating which of the plurality of switching destination emission colors to start the emission control of the LEDs 71a to 73a from which switching destination emission color. With this configuration, it is possible to derive a plurality of light emission data from one pallet data by a simple method of different starting position numbers, and the light emission data can be stored while suppressing the storage capacity of the sound-side ROM 113. Diversification can be realized while facilitating design.

  In the pallet data, the content of the light emission color of the switching destination when the light emission colors of the LEDs 71a to 73a are sequentially switched is determined, and the duration applied to the palette data is the switching time defined in the pallet data. It is a parameter indicating the duration when the replacement emission color is continued. With this configuration, it is possible to derive a plurality of light emission data from one pallet data by a simple method of varying the duration time, and a variety of light emission data while suppressing the storage capacity of the sound side ROM 113. Can be realized while making the design easier.

  The light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 include a plurality of LEDs 71 a to 73 a, and start position numbers and continuations applied to some of the LEDs 71 a to 73 a while using the same palette data for the plurality of LEDs 71 a to 73 a. By making the times different, it becomes possible to derive different light emission data for the plurality of LEDs 71a to 73a while using the same palette data. As a result, even when different effects are executed among the plurality of LEDs 71a to 73a, the same palette data can be used, so that it is possible to diversify the effects while suppressing the storage capacity.

  There are cases where the same palette data is used for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73 and different palette data is used. Accordingly, it is possible to switch between a simple light emission effect mode and a complicated light emission effect mode only by changing the number of palette data applied to the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73.

  When different palette data is applied to one light emitting unit group 71 to 73, list data and group data indicating the type of palette data corresponding to each LED 71a to 73a included in the light emitting unit group 71 to 73 are used. It is the composition which is done. Thereby, simplification of the process for applying the pallet data corresponding to each LED 71a-73a is achieved.

  The light emission data area 162 is provided with a base area 162a, an interrupt area 162b, and a notification area 162c. The light emission data can be stored in each of the areas 162a to 162c. Thereby, in the situation where the light emission control of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is performed using one light emission data, it is necessary to perform the light emission control of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 using other light emission data. Even in this case, the other light emission data can be stored separately from the one light emission data. Thereby, it is possible to generate various light emission patterns according to the situation in one light emitting unit group 71 to 73. Further, when switching from one light emission pattern to the next light emission pattern, it is possible to leave the light emission data corresponding to the former light emission pattern, so that the processing load when returning to the former light emission pattern can be reduced. Figured.

  When the use of the previously used light emission data is stopped and the use of other light emission data is started, the use of the other light emission data is terminated and the light emission data used previously is used. When returning, at the return timing, the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 perform the same light emission mode as the case where the previously used light emission data is continuously used. Thereby, even if interruption use of other light emission data occurs, it becomes possible to perform the light emission mode according to elapsed time in the light emission part groups 71-73. In particular, in a configuration in which the light emission modes of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 are performed in association with the display content of the symbol display device 31, it is possible to ensure the correspondence with the display content on the symbol display device 31.

  In the light emission data, the priority in the case where the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 are used is determined, and when a plurality of pieces of light emission data are stored at the same time, when using one light emission data, the priority is high. In this configuration, the emission data is used. As a result, in a configuration in which a plurality of light emission data is stored at the same time, light emission data having a high priority is used, so that the light emission operation occurring in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 can be made appropriate. Further, even when a plurality of light emission data is stored at the same time, it is possible to easily select light emission data to be used by comparing priorities. Therefore, the process for selecting the light emission data to be used can be simplified.

  In the light emission data area 162 of the sound light side RAM 114, a base area 162a, an interrupt area 162b, and a notification area 162c are provided, and the priority of the light emission data is set in units of these areas. Thereby, when selecting the light emission data to be used, it is not necessary to compare the priorities for each light emission data. Therefore, the process for selecting the light emission data to be used can be simplified.

  The interrupt area 162b is configured such that a new light emission data storage instruction can be issued in a situation where the light emission data is already stored in the interrupt area 162b. The light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b includes When the light emission side priority for storing in the interrupt area 162b is determined and the light emission data is already stored in the interrupt area 162b, a new light emission data storage instruction has already been generated. If the stored emission data has a higher emission side priority than the new emission data, the stored emission data is stored without executing the new emission data storage process. If the new emission data has higher priority on the emission side than the already stored emission data, the new emission data is used for interrupt. It is overwritten in the rear 162b.

  With this configuration, light emission control of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is performed using other light emission data in a situation where the light emission control of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is performed using one light emission data. When necessary, it is possible to switch to light emission control using the other light emission data. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform various operation | movement according to a condition in the one light emission part group 71-73. Further, in a configuration in which new light emission data can be overwritten even when light emission data is already stored in the interrupt area 162b, the light emission data having a high light emission side priority is stored in the interrupt area 162b. Therefore, the light emitting operation in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 can be made appropriate. Furthermore, when determining the light emission data to be stored in the interrupt area 162b, it is only necessary to compare the light emission side priorities, so that the processing for storing the light emission data in the interrupt area 162b can be simplified. .

  The sound output data area 163 includes a first sound output area 171 to a sixteenth sound output area 186, and each of the areas 171 to 186 can store sound output data. Thereby, in the situation where sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed using one sound output data, it becomes necessary to perform sound output control of the speaker unit 45 using other sound output data. Even if it exists, the other sound output data can be stored separately from the one sound output data. As a result, the speaker unit 45 can output various sounds according to the situation. Further, when switching from one sound output pattern to the next sound output pattern, it is possible to leave sound output data corresponding to the former sound output pattern, so that when returning to the former sound output pattern, The processing load can be reduced.

  If you stop using the previously used sound output data and start using other sound output data, the use of the other sound output data ends and the previously used sound output data is When returning to the use state, at the return timing, the same sound output as that in the case where the previously used sound output data is continuously used is performed by the speaker unit 45. Thereby, even if interruption use of other sound output data occurs, it becomes possible to cause the speaker unit 45 to perform a sound output mode corresponding to the elapsed time. In particular, in a configuration in which the sound output mode of the speaker unit 45 is performed in association with the display content of the symbol display device 31, it is possible to ensure the correspondence with the display content on the symbol display device 31.

  In the sound output data, the sound output side priority in the case where the speaker unit 45 is to be used is defined, and when a plurality of sound output data is stored at the same time, In this configuration, sound output data having a high output side priority is used. As a result, in a configuration in which a plurality of sound output data is simultaneously stored, sound output data having a high sound output side priority is used, so that the sound output operation generated in the speaker unit 45 can be made appropriate. It becomes. Further, even when a plurality of sound output data is stored simultaneously, it is possible to easily select sound output data to be used by comparing the sound output side priorities. Therefore, the process for selecting the sound output data to be used can be simplified.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for synchronizing the rotation stop timings of the pair of left and right disc movable objects 62a and 62b in the disc effect by the synchronization control processing is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing a sensor monitoring process executed by the sound light side MPU 112. The sensor monitoring process is periodically executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 112 regardless of whether or not a disk production stop command is issued from the display side MPU 122. In addition, since the sensor monitoring process is executed once every time the timer interrupt process is activated once, the sensor monitoring process is executed at least once, whereas the synchronous control process described later is executed once. It becomes.

  In the sensor monitoring process, first, the left-side history shift process is executed in step S3101. Here, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), in the movable object data area 164 of the sound side RAM 114, the current area 164a on the left side is stored as an area for storing the detection result of the left rotation initial position sensor 69a. , A previous area 164b on the left side and a preceding area 164c on the left side are provided. The latest detection result in the left rotation initial position sensor 69a is stored in the left current area 164a. In the previous area 164b on the left side, the detection result in the left rotation initial position sensor 69a one process before the detection result stored in the current area 164a on the left side is stored. In the left-hand front area 164c, the detection result of the left rotation initial position sensor 69a two processing times before the detection result stored in the left-side current area 164a is stored. In step S3101, after clearing the left previous area 164c, the data stored in the left previous area 164b is shifted to the left previous area 164c, and the data stored in the left current area 164a is shifted to the left. Shift to the previous area 164b and clear the current area 164a on the left side. Thereafter, in step S3102, the detection result of the left rotation initial position sensor 69a is stored in the left current area 164a. In each of the areas 164a to 164c, “1”, which is one of binary data, is stored when the detection result of the left rotation initial position sensor 69a is ON, and when the detection result is OFF, The other “0” is stored.

  In the subsequent step S3103, the right-side history shift process is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), in the movable object data area 164 of the sound side RAM 114, as the area for storing the detection result of the right rotation initial position sensor 69b, A right previous area 164e and a right previous area 164f are provided. The latest detection result of the right rotation initial position sensor 69b is stored in the right current area 164d. The right previous area 164e stores the detection result of the right rotation initial position sensor 69b one process before the detection result stored in the right current area 164d. In the right-hand front area 164f, the detection result in the right rotation initial position sensor 69b two processing times before the detection result stored in the right-side current area 164d is stored. In step S3103, after clearing the right previous area 164f, the data stored in the right previous area 164e is shifted to the right previous area 164f, and the data stored in the right current area 164d is shifted to the right. Shift to the previous area 164e and clear the current area 164d on the right side. Thereafter, in step S3104, the detection result of the right rotation initial position sensor 69b is stored in the right current area 164d, and then the present sensor monitoring process is terminated. In each of the areas 164d to 164f, “1” which is one of binary data is stored when the detection result of the right rotation initial position sensor 69b is ON, and when the detection result is OFF, The other “0” is stored.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the synchronization control processing in the present embodiment, which is executed in the sound light side MPU 112.

  First, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the disk movable objects 62a and 62b have started rotating and before the return operation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not “1” is set in the stop command flag of the sound side RAM 114. If a negative determination is made in step S3202, the synchronization control process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the process proceeds to step S3203.

  In step S3203, the left-side slide start process toward the initial position is executed in the same manner as in step S2716 in the first embodiment, and in step S3204, in the same manner as in step S2717 in the first embodiment, The right-side slide start process toward the position is executed. Thereafter, in step S3205, the left-side history calculation process is executed, and in step S3206, the right-side history calculation process is executed.

  In the history calculation process on the left side, data is read from each of the current area 164a on the left side, the previous area 164b on the left side, and the previous area 164c on the left side in the movable object data area 164 of the sound light side RAM 114, and the contents of these data are the rotation initial position An arithmetic process necessary for determining whether or not the content corresponds to the above is executed. Specifically, the data read from the area 164c two times before is inverted (“0” → “1”, “1” → “0”), the inverted data, the data from the current area 164a, and the previous area AND the data from 164b.

  Further, in the history calculation process on the right side, data is read from each of the current area 164d on the right side, the previous area 164e on the right side, and the previous area 164f on the right side in the movable object data area 164 of the sound light side RAM 114, and the contents of these data are rotated. Arithmetic processing necessary for determining whether or not the content corresponds to the initial position is executed. Specifically, the data read from the area 164f the last time is inverted (“0” → “1”, “1” → “0”), the inverted data, the data from the current area 164d, and the previous area AND the data from 164e.

  In a succeeding step S3207, it is determined whether or not the history calculation results in both the step S3205 and the step S3206 correspond to the stop result. Specifically, it is determined whether or not both the history calculation results are “1”. That is, in both the left and right history areas, it is determined whether or not the previous time area is “0” and the previous area and the current area are both “1”. If a negative determination is made in step S3207, the synchronization control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3207, the rotation stop process is executed in step S3208, and then the synchronization control process is terminated. . In the rotation stop process, the driving state of both the left disk rotation driving unit 67a and the right disk rotation driving unit 67b is stopped.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3209 whether the return operation is being performed. If the return operation is in progress, in steps S3210 to S3213, processing is performed to stop the slide movement of the movable discs 62a and 62b at the initial slide position. The processing contents of steps S3210 to S3213 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2901 to S2904 in the first embodiment.

  In a succeeding step S3214, it is determined whether or not at least one of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b is rotating. If a negative determination is made in step S3214, the synchronization control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3214, the process proceeds to step S3215.

  In step S3215, the left-side history calculation process is executed in the same manner as in step S3205. In subsequent step S3206, it is determined whether or not the history calculation result corresponds to the stop result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3216, in step S3217, the drive state of the left disk rotation drive unit 67a is stopped by executing a left rotation stop process.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3216, or if the process of step S3217 is executed, the history calculation process on the right side is executed in step S3218 as in step S3206, and the history calculation is performed in subsequent step S3219. It is determined whether the result corresponds to the stop result. If a negative determination is made in step S3219, the synchronization control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3219, a right rotation stop process is executed in step S3220, thereby After stopping the driving state of the disk rotation driving unit 67b, the synchronization control process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3209, other synchronization processing is executed in step S3221, and then this synchronization control processing is terminated. In the other processes, the processes in steps S2701 to S2712 of the synchronization control process (FIG. 46) in the first embodiment are executed. However, in the synchronous control process according to the present embodiment, the stop timing adjustment is not performed by monitoring the number of steps, and therefore the number of steps update process is not executed in the processes corresponding to step S2708 and step S2709.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, unlike the first embodiment, the detection results of the respective rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are stored as histories. Even if a disk production stop command is generated immediately after the rotation position is set at the initial rotation position, it is possible to accurately confirm that the respective movable disk objects 62a and 62b are positioned at the rotation initial position by checking the history. It becomes possible to grasp. Therefore, both the disc movable objects 62a and 62b can be used without adopting the configuration in which each of the disc movable objects 62a and 62b is rotated one extra turn or the number of steps is monitored as in the first embodiment. Can be stopped at the initial rotation position in a synchronized state.

  In addition, when both the left and right history areas have data contents corresponding to the stop result, the rotation of the respective disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped. Therefore, both the respective disk movable objects 62a and 62b are rotated. It is possible to stop at the initial position.

  Moreover, when specifying the stop timing of each disk movable thing 62a, 62b, it is the structure by which the log | history area on either side is always referred and the same log | history calculation process is performed further. Therefore, it is possible to share the processing configuration for specifying the stop timing, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

  The sensor monitoring process may be executed twice or more with respect to one execution of the synchronization control process. In this case, it is possible to monitor the detection results of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b in more detail.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the third stage operation is started in the curtain production by the third stage effect, not only the light emission control and the sound output control but also the display effect execution control synchronized with the display control is performed. Is called. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a pair wait control process in the present embodiment, which is executed in the sound light side MPU 112.

  First, in step S3301, similarly to step S2301 in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is after the start of driving. If a negative determination is made in step S3301, the first step is performed in step S3302. Similarly to step S2302 in the embodiment, after the return start process is executed for both curtain plate drive units 56a and 56b, the pair wait control process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, it is determined in step S3303 whether one of the adjustment position sensors 58a, 58b is ON, as in step S2303 in the first embodiment. . If a negative determination is made in step S3303, the pair wait control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3303, in step S3304, as in step S2304 in the first embodiment. Stop processing of the corresponding curtain plate driving units 56a and 56b is executed.

  In subsequent step S3305, as in step S2305 in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not both of the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are ON. If a negative determination is made in step S3305, the pair wait control process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, the process proceeds to step S3306.

  In step S3306, as in step S2306 in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the third stage effect flag. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3306, in step S3307, as in step S2307 in the first embodiment, a reading process of light emission data for the third stage effect is executed, and in step S3308. Similarly to step S2308 in the first embodiment, the third stage effect sound output data is read out. Thereafter, in step S3309, a progress command is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. In step S3310, as in step S2309 in the first embodiment, the pair wait control flag is cleared to “0”, and the third stage control flag is set to “1”. The process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S3306, the pair wait control flag is cleared to “0” and the return control flag is set to “1” in step S3311, as in step S2310 in the first embodiment. After this is set, this pair wait control process is terminated.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing command response processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the display side MPU 122.

  In step S3401, it is determined whether a progress command has been received from the sound light side MPU 112 or not. If a progress command has been received, in step S3402, in the currently set pattern data table, after executing the skip processing to the start pointer information of the production range corresponding to the progress command, this command is supported. The process ends.

  In the pattern data table, contents of tasks corresponding to execution of the curtain board effect by the third stage effect are set. In this case, the content of the task is set to continue to display the same image before the third stage operation, or set to keep a predetermined moving image looping before the third stage operation. The setting is canceled when the command is received and the display effect corresponding to the third stage operation is started. As a result, with respect to the execution control of the display effect, the control based on the start command from the sound light side MPU 112 is exceptionally performed with respect to the start of the third stage operation, while the display control with the passage of time is basically performed. . With this configuration, in the configuration in which the display effect corresponding to the third stage operation is performed, the display effect is easily synchronized with the operation of the curtain plate movable object 52.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3401, other command processing is executed in step S3403, and then this command response processing ends. In the other processes, the same processes as steps S801 to S811 of the command corresponding process (FIG. 17) in the first embodiment are executed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as a game-playing effect, the symbol display on the symbol display device 31 is in a predetermined manner (specifically, the symbol variation display on all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started at high speed). The unit variation display in which the variation display is ended and the predetermined stop symbol is stopped and displayed after the start is started can be generated a plurality of times. Accordingly, the processing contents of the main-side command handling process and the display-side command handling process in the sound light side MPU 112 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, each of these corresponding processes will be described. In the following description, an effect in which unit variation display is performed a plurality of times in one game time is referred to as a pseudo game time effect, and each unit variation display time in the pseudo game time effect is referred to as a pseudo game time.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing main-side command handling processing in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S3501, it is determined whether a change command and a type command are received from the main MPU 92 or not. If these commands have been received, a game result and display duration storage process is executed in step S3502. The game result information is specified from the type command as in the first embodiment, and the display duration information is specified from the change command.

  In a succeeding step S3503, it is determined whether or not the current display continuation time corresponds to the execution of the pseudo game turn effect. That is, whether or not to execute the pseudo game round effect is uniquely determined by the display duration time. In this case, in the main MPU 92, it is easier to select the display continuation time corresponding to the pseudo game times effect in the game times that are the jackpot result and the game times that are the reach reach display than the other game times. It has a configuration. Further, not only the presence / absence of execution of the pseudo game times effect, but also the number of times of the pseudo game times executed in the pseudo game times effect is uniquely determined by the display duration time. In this case, the number of simulated game times is either 2, 3, or 4 times, and the game times that are jackpot results and the game times that show a disappointing reach display with high expectation of the jackpot results are the jackpot The number of simulated game times is larger than the number of game times in which the expectation of the result is low and the reach is displayed.

  In the subsequent step S3504, the number of pseudo game times is stored in the holding data area 161 of the sound light side RAM 114. Thereafter, in step S3505, a notice lottery process is executed. The content of the process is the same as that in step S603 in the first embodiment.

  In the subsequent step S3506, a first stop symbol determination process is executed. The stop symbol determination process corresponds to a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5 and a combination of reach symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5. Information, and information on stop results corresponding to pseudo game times other than the last game (for example, information on stop results where a predetermined symbol combination such as “3, 4, 1” is established on any active line) It is determined as information on the result of this stop. In step S3507, the first effect pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the effect pattern of the first pseudo game time corresponding to the display duration of the current game time is selected. Incidentally, the display duration of the first pseudo game times is shorter than the display duration of the current game times.

  In subsequent step S3508, the information on the type of effect pattern selected in step S3507 and the type of stop symbol determined in step S3506 are written in the holding data area 161 of the sound side RAM 114. Thereafter, in step S3509, the stop result command and the pattern command are transmitted to the display-side MPU 122 in the same manner as in step S607 in the first embodiment, and in step S3510, step S608 in the first embodiment is performed. Similarly, a process for updating the number of games is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3503, processing similar to that in steps S605 to S608 in the first embodiment is executed as processing for non-winning in step S3511. If a negative determination is made in step S3501, the process in step S3510 is executed, or the process in step S3511 is executed, the other steps in step S3512 are performed as steps in the first embodiment. The same processing as S609 to step S629 is executed.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing display-side command handling processing in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S3601, it is determined whether a change end command has been received from the display-side MPU 122 or not. The change end command is transmitted from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112 when the display control using the pattern data table read out when the display side MPU 122 receives the stop result command and the pattern command is completed. Command. In step S3602, it is determined whether or not the pseudo game times effect is being executed in the current game time. In step S3603, it is determined whether or not the number of times of the pseudo game stored in the sound side RAM 114 in step S3504 of the main side command handling process is larger than the number of times of execution of the pseudo game times completed in the current game time. judge.

  If an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S3601 to S3603, the process proceeds to step S3604. In step S3604, the current game result and display duration time stored in the retained data area 161 of the sound side RAM 114 are read. After that, in step S3605, the type of effect pattern of the pseudo game times of the current game time is read.

  In the subsequent step S3606, a stop symbol determination process corresponding to the number of executions is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, when the current pseudo game time is not the final time, the same stop result information as the first stop symbol determination process is selected, and the current pseudo game time is the final time In the same manner as in step S604 in the first embodiment, information on the stop result corresponding to the game result of the current game round is selected.

  In the subsequent step S3607, an effect pattern determination process corresponding to the number of executions is executed. In the effect pattern determination process, if the current pseudo game time is not the final game time, an effect pattern corresponding to the display duration of the current game time and the number of execution times of the current pseudo game time is selected. When the current pseudo game number is the last time, an effect pattern in which a reach display of a type corresponding to the current display duration time is executed is selected. In the effect pattern determination process, by referring to the information read in step S3605, the effect pattern is selected so that a common effect is executed in each pseudo game round. Specifically, when the notice display is performed in the first pseudo game round, the notice display is also performed in the pseudo game round executed later in the current game round. In this case, a notice display with a higher expectation of the jackpot result may be performed in the rear pseudo game times.

  In subsequent step S3608, the information on the type of effect pattern selected in step S3607 and the type of stop symbol determined in step S3606 are written in the holding data area 161 of the sound side RAM 114. Thereafter, in step S3609, the stop result command and the pattern command are transmitted to the display side MPU 122 in the same manner as in step S607 in the first embodiment, and the number of executions provided in the sound side RAM 114 in step S3610. Add 1 to the counter value.

  If a negative determination is made in any of step S3601, step S3602, and step S3603, or if the process of step S3610 is executed, the display side command in the first embodiment is executed as another process in step S3611. Steps S1201 to S1216 of the corresponding process (FIG. 22) are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, even if the pseudo game times effect is performed, the data table for the whole of each pseudo game time is read by the display side MPU 122 and the sound light side MPU 112 displays the display side. In this configuration, control data is set according to a command transmitted from the MPU 122 during pseudo game play, and the light emission control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 are performed. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to set control data even when a pseudo game turn effect is performed.

  Further, at the start of each pseudo game round, the sound pattern side MPU 112 determines the production pattern based on the game result of the corresponding game round and the contents of the pseudo game round digested so far. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the effect pattern of the pseudo game times is determined based on the game result of the game times and the contents of the pseudo game times that have been digested so far, the processing load for making the determination is changed to the sound side MPU 112. It becomes possible to distribute to. Therefore, the processing load can be distributed.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) Similar to the disk movable objects 62a and 62b, as the movable object, a movable object that is driven by the slide operation drive unit and performs a slide operation and is rotated by the rotation operation drive unit is provided. When the slide operation and the rotation operation are simultaneously started from the respective predetermined positions after the operation and the rotation operation are individually performed, the fact that the respective predetermined positions are detected is detected by the respective predetermined position detection sensors. It is good also as a structure which starts both operation | movement simultaneously. This makes it easier to synchronize the start of both operations.

  (2) When the rotational operations of the pair of left and right disc movable objects 62a and 62b are individually performed asynchronously and then the rotational operations of the disc movable objects 62a and 62b are simultaneously started from the respective rotation initial positions, It is good also as a structure which starts both rotation operation | movement simultaneously, after arrange | positioning having been detected by each rotation initial position sensor 69a, 69b. Thereby, it becomes easy to synchronize the start of both rotation operations.

  (3) When it is detected by the detection sensor that the movable object is arranged at a predetermined position, a predetermined effect is produced by another effect means that is at least one of a sound output effect, a light emission effect, and a display effect. When focusing on the effect that it becomes easier to synchronize the operation of the movable object and the effects in the other production means, it is not essential that the movable object includes a plurality of driving objects. It is good also as a structure which has only a single drive object.

  (4) A configuration in which when a plurality of driving objects are arranged at predetermined positions by corresponding detection sensors, the driving object is configured so that a predetermined operation is performed in synchronization with these driving objects. You may apply to the structure which is a piece, and may apply to the structure whose said drive object is four or more.

  (5) When the third stage operation is executed after the curtain plate movable object 52 executes the second stage operation, the pair of slide members 55a and 55b are detected by the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. However, instead of this, the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are provided near the limit position or near the limit position, and are displaced toward the limit position side to be adjusted by the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. After the pair of slide members 55a and 55b is detected, the curtain moving object 52 may be operated in a horizontal state toward the initial position side or toward the limit position side as a third stage operation.

  (6) A configuration in which when a plurality of drive objects are arranged at predetermined positions by corresponding detection sensors, a predetermined operation is performed on these drive objects in a synchronized manner. However, the present invention may be applied to a configuration in which each driven object operates an individual movable object instead of a configuration in which one curtain plate movable object 52 is operated.

  (7) When the stop command flag is set to “1” in a state where the respective disk movable objects 62a and 62b are rotating, when any of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b is turned ON, It is good also as a structure which stops rotation operation | movement of both the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. In this case, the limit range may not be set as in the first embodiment, and the detection result history of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b may not be stored as in the second embodiment. .

  (8) In the configuration in which each of the movable discs 62a and 62b is such that at least one of the outer edge shape and the decorative shape does not match between the predetermined rotation positions, and both the outer edge shape and the decoration shape match between the specific rotation positions. These specific rotational positions may be the initial rotational positions of the movable discs 62a and 62b. In this case, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b have a plurality of rotation initial positions. In this configuration, a rotation initial position sensor may be provided at each rotation initial position, and in this case, variations in the rotation period of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b according to the timing at which “1” is set in the stop command flag. Can be increased.

  In addition, a limit range may be provided so as to include a detection range of each rotation initial position sensor, and each limit range may not include a limit range adjacent to the rotation axis. In addition, by setting the number of steps for stop release determination when the stop is limited to the number of steps before the detection range of the rotation initial position sensor adjacent to the rotation axis, the disc movable objects 62a and 62b It is possible to shorten the period during which the stop is limited.

  (9) The number of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b to be subjected to the synchronization operation is not limited to two, and may be three, four, or five or more.

  (10) The configuration for stopping each disk movable object 62a, 62b synchronously is stopped by reciprocating on a straight line or a curved line and synchronizing a plurality of movable objects whose initial positions exist on the reciprocating path. You may apply as a structure for making it do.

  (11) In the second embodiment, if any history calculation result is the data content to be stopped when “1” is set in the stop command flag, both disk movable objects It is good also as a structure which stops rotation of 62a, 62b. In this case, it is possible to shorten the period from when the stop command flag is set to “1” until the rotation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped.

  (12) In the second embodiment, for each of the movable discs 62a and 62b, three areas for storing the detection results of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b as histories are used, but one may be used. Two or four or more may be used. In this case, if there are two or more, the rotation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b can be stopped when the state where the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are turned on is confirmed a plurality of times. For example, when the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are turned on, the occurrence of an event that the rotation of the movable discs 62a and 62b is stopped is suppressed. If the number is three or more, it is possible to specify the rising or falling of the signals of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b while achieving the effect of the two or more. However, in the configuration of three or more, when data indicating that the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are in the detection state are continuously set, the rising of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b or It is good also as a structure which stops rotation of each disc movable thing 62a, 62b irrespective of whether it corresponds to falling.

  The number of areas for storing the detection results as history is monitored by the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b that may occur in the situation where the movable disk objects 62a and 62b exist within the detection range of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b. It is preferable to be within the range of the number of processing times. In this case, when the result corresponding to the non-detection of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b is stored in the most recent area, the stop control of the movable discs 62a and 62b is not performed. As a result, even if the history is confirmed and the rotation of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped, the stop position can be limited within the detection range of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b.

  (13) In the second embodiment, the configuration in which the detection results of the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are constantly monitored by the sound light side MPU 112 is not essential. For example, when the disk effect is started, the rotation initial position The monitoring of the detection results of the sensors 69a and 69b may be started, and the monitoring of the detection results of the initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b is started when the return operation is started in the movable discs 62a and 62b. It is good also as a structure.

  (14) The rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are not provided, and the rotation positions of the respective disk movable objects 62a and 62b are grasped only from the number of steps. The rotation initial positions of the respective disk movable objects 62a and 62b are determined from the number of steps. It is good also as a structure which specifies. In this case, when the number of steps when the stop command flag is set to “1” is a specific number of steps, the disc movable objects 62a and 62b are synchronized and stopped after being displaced by a predetermined number of steps. By doing so, for example, it is possible to stop each of the movable disk objects 62a and 62b in synchronization with the initial rotation position determined from the number of steps.

  (15) At the start of a series of effects such as game times and opening / closing execution modes, the sound light side MPU 112 does not receive a command corresponding to the start of the series of effects from the display side MPU 122, and various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 are received. The light emission control and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 may be started. In particular, when a winning is generated in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 in a situation where the holding information is not stored in the holding area RE and the game times are started, the start timing of the game times is an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the display-side MPU 122 cannot transmit a command corresponding to the start of the game times in advance. In this case, as described above, at the start of the series production, by performing the light emission control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 without receiving a command from the display side MPU 122, These effects are less likely to be delayed with respect to the start timing of the game times.

  (16) The display side MPU 122 only outputs a command indicating that it is the timing corresponding to the change of the production content to the sound light side MPU 112, and the timing corresponding to the change corresponds to any production content. It is good also as a structure specified in the sound-light side MPU112. For example, the sound light side MPU 112 measures the number of transmission commands of the display side MPU 122 after the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are started, and the command transmitted by the display side MPU 122 is assigned to any effect content from the measurement result. A configuration for identifying whether the switching is supported can be considered. Specifically, in the situation where the data table shown in FIG. 18 is read by the display-side MPU 122, the sound-side MPU 112 specifies that the first command reception corresponds to the start of fluctuation, and the second time. It is specified that the command reception corresponds to the start of the notice effect. According to such a configuration, the content of the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122 can be simplified, and for example, a period necessary for command transmission can be shortened.

  (17) Even if the data whose relatively long side is set in the RAM is not the display side MPU 122 but the sound light side MPU 112 as the data for executing a series of effects in the game times and the opening / closing execution mode Good. In this case, the entire flow of the series effect is controlled according to the data table set in the sound light side MPU 112, and when the execution timing of each effect range included in the series effect is reached, the sound light side MPU 112 displays the display side MPU 122. And the display-side MPU 122 receives the command, reads out data for controlling the effect range corresponding to the command, and performs execution control of the effect in the effect range.

  (18) The sound light side MPU 112 may be configured to always monitor whether or not the effect operating device 48 has been operated. In this case, when the production operation device 48 is operated, an operation generation command is transmitted from the sound side MPU 112, and in response to this, the display side MPU 122 determines whether or not the operation is during the operation valid period. Done. In this configuration, it is not necessary for the display side MPU 122 to transmit an operation valid start command and an operation valid end command.

  (19) When an operation generation command for the production operation device 48 is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 112, when the operation generation command is during the operation effective period of the production operation device 48, the display side MPU 122 sends an operation effective command. Instead of transmitting, an operation effect may be started and an operation effect command may be transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112. In this configuration, the display side MPU 122 does not need to transmit an operation valid command, and the sound light side MPU 112 does not need to transmit an execution permission command.

  (20) When an operation valid command is received from the display side MPU 122, the sound light side MPU 112 starts reading light emission control data and sound output control data corresponding to the operation effect, and the display side MPU 122 starts the operation effect. When a command is received, the light emission side MPU 112 may perform light emission control or sound output control using data that has been read out.

  (21) The effect operation device 48 may be configured to output an operation signal to control means other than the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122, for example, the main side MPU 92. Even in this case, in the configuration in which the information indicating whether or not the presentation operation device 48 has been operated is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112 prior to the display side MPU 122, the configuration described in the above embodiments. Is preferably applied.

  The effect operation device 48 may be configured to output an operation signal to the display side MPU 122 instead of the sound light side MPU 112. In this case, when the sound effect side MPU 112 is configured to determine the contents of the operation effect, it is necessary to execute the operation effect after performing bidirectional communication between the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122. Occurs.

  (22) The timing at which the display-side MPU 122 transmits a command to the sound-light-side MPU 112 is not limited to the timing for showing the transition of the production content, but every time a predetermined number of frames are consumed, that is, the display-side MPU 122. The command may be transmitted from the display-side MPU 122 to the sound-light-side MPU 112 each time the number of times that the control display timing of the symbol display device 31 is reached is a predetermined number. In this case, the command includes data corresponding to the current pointer information in the data table read out by the display side MPU 122, for example, the type of the symbol displayed on the symbol display device 31, the content of the background image, other than the symbol. A frame content such as a character type and a motion content of the character may be set. The sound light side MPU 112 may be configured to specify light emission data and sound output data to be set from the frame contents included in the command. According to this configuration, the display-side MPU 122 only needs to transmit a command periodically, and it is only necessary to set the frame content in the command. And the processing can be simplified.

  The command transmission is not performed every frame, but the command is transmitted once in a specific number of frames such as 10 frames or 100 frames. The frequency can be suppressed.

  Further, in this configuration, since a command for setting the emission data and sound output data in advance is not transmitted to the sound side MPU 112, at the timing when the command is received, the emission data and sound output data are not transmitted. Setting will be started.

  (23) The timing at which the display side MPU 122 transmits a command to the sound light side MPU 112 is not limited to the timing for indicating the transition of the content of the effect, and the effect period of the data table read by the display side MPU 122 A command is transmitted from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112 at each timing corresponding to the start of these divided ranges, and control data corresponding to the divided range is set in the sound light side MPU 112. It is good also as a structure to be. For example, when the production period of the above data table is divided into the first half and the second half, the command is transmitted at a timing corresponding to the start of the first half of the divided range, and at the timing corresponding to the start of the second half of the divided range. Will be sent. According to this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process for specifying the command transmission timing in the display-side MPU 122.

  (24) The display-side MPU 122 does not read the entire data table corresponding to the series of effects in the game times and the opening / closing execution mode at once, but from the light emission data and sound output data set at one time in the sound light-side MPU 112. Although a data table corresponding to a long period is read out, it may be configured to correspond to a period shorter than the whole corresponding to a series of effects. For example, when a command is transmitted from the light-side MPU 112 to the display-side MPU 122 in response to receiving a command from the main-side MPU 92, the display-side MPU 122 may read the data table for each command.

  In this case, during the game round, when the main MPU 92 transmits the change command and the type command, the display side MPU 122 reads the data table from the start of the game round to the timing immediately before the final stop display of the symbol. When the main side MPU 92 transmits a final stop command, the display side MPU 122 may be configured to read a data table for the period of the last stop display of the game times.

  In addition, during the opening / closing execution mode, when the main MPU 92 transmits an opening command, the display MPU 122 has a data table from the start of the opening / closing execution mode until the first opening of the special prize winning device 22 is started. When the main MPU 92 transmits an open command, the display MPU 122 reads the data table corresponding to the open time, and when the main MPU 92 transmits a close command, the display MPU 122 When the data table corresponding to the interval is read and the main MPU 92 transmits an ending command, the display MPU 122 reads the data table from the start of the ending effect to the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  Even in this configuration, the sound light side MPU 112 receives light emission data and sound output data corresponding to a shorter period than the data table read by the display side MPU 122 according to the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122 each time. With the configuration to be set, it is possible to suppress the necessary storage capacity. In this configuration, for a part of the production range, the corresponding period of the light emission data and sound output data read by the sound light side MPU 112 may be the same as the corresponding period of the data table read by the display side MPU 122. Good.

  (25) The command transmitted from the main MPU 92 may be received not only by the sound light MPU 112 but also by the display MPU 122. In this case, when a command is transmitted from the main MPU 92, the sound light MPU 112 transmits a command indicating that the command from the main MPU 92 has been normally received to the display MPU 122, and the display MPU 122 transmits the command. When the command is received from the sound light side MPU 112, a data table corresponding to the command received from the main side MPU 92 may be read. In this case, the sound light side MPU 112 may read out a data table corresponding to the command received from the main side MPU 92. However, as in the above embodiments, the data table corresponding to the command is set. Instead, the required storage capacity can be reduced by setting the light emission data and the sound output data corresponding to the partial production range according to the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122. Further, in the configuration, when a notification target event such as an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, a notification command is transmitted to both the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122. When the display side MPU 122 receives a notification command, the notification on the various light emitting units 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 and the notification on the symbol display device 31 are started without waiting for command transmission from the other party. Also good.

  (26) The retained data area 161 of the sound light side RAM 114 may be configured to measure the number of times that a predetermined notice display or a predetermined reach display has been performed. In this case, for example, when a predetermined notice display is not executed even though a predetermined number of game times have been consumed, the selection probability of the predetermined notice display may be increased. May be forcibly selected.

  (27) When the game result information of the game times is stored and held in the holding data area 161 of the sound light side RAM 114, and the sound light side MPU 112 receives a command corresponding to the execution timing of the confirmed effect from the display side MPU 122 Although it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the confirmed effect by referring to the game result information stored and retained in the retained data area 161, the display side MPU 122 is not limited to this. By performing command transmission based on game result information, the sound light side MPU 112 may be configured to perform execution control of the confirmed effect when a command corresponding to the execution of the confirmed effect is received from the display side MPU 122.

  (28) Even when the sound light side MPU 112 receives the confirmation execution command from the display side MPU 122, the sound effect side MPU 112 refers to the information of the game result of the game times stored and retained in the retained data area 161, thereby confirming the effect. It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute. In this case, even if some kind of abnormality occurs and the final effect is executed on the symbol display device 31 even though it is not the jackpot result, the final effects on the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 are executed. It becomes possible to stop. At this time, in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45, it may be notified that the finalized effect in the symbol display device 31 is not a normal operation.

  (29) The configuration in which the sound light side MPU 112 reads a plurality of control data in response to one command from the display side MPU 122 is in addition to or in place of the sound output data read processing, instead of the light emission data read processing. You may apply. Further, the number of control data read for one command is not limited to two, and may be three or more.

  (30) The display side MPU 122 reads control data corresponding to a longer period than the control data set at once in the sound light side MPU 112, and the sound light side MPU 112 transmits a command from the display side MPU 122. Accordingly, when the control data corresponding to a part of the production range is set, when attention is paid to the effect that the storage capacity for setting the control data is reduced, the sound light side MPU 112 is used. And the display-side MPU 122 do not have to be bidirectional communication. For example, when the main MPU 92 is used as a reference, the display MPU 122 is configured to exist upstream in the communication direction with respect to the sound light MPU 112, and a series of commands corresponding to commands transmitted from the main MPU 92 in the display MPU 122. When the data table for the entire effect is read and the sound side MPU 112 is configured to set control data corresponding to a partial effect range according to the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122, the sound The communication method between the optical side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 may not be bidirectional communication.

  (31) Between the effect that is executed and controlled by the sound light side MPU 112 and the effect that is executed and controlled by the display side MPU 122 because the communication method between the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 is bidirectional communication. If attention is paid to the effect that it is difficult to cause a shift, the data table corresponding to the entire series of effects may be read out in both the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122. In this case, for example, one of the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 determines whether or not execution control of a predetermined production range should be started in accordance with a command transmitted from the other, and is a start timing. It is good also as a structure which updates the pointer information about the data table for the whole already read when it specifies as the information corresponding to the start timing of the predetermined production | presentation range.

  (32) The configuration for deriving the control information group by applying the setting information to the original information may be applied to the sound output data in addition to or instead of the light emission data. You may apply with respect to drive data. For example, when applied to drive data for moving object drive control, when the operation contents of the movable object are sequentially switched, the original data in which the operation contents of the switching destination are defined and a plurality of switching data defined in the original data Starting reference data indicating which of the switching destination operation contents the operation of the movable object starts from the switching destination operation contents, and continuation when continuing the switching destination operation contents defined in the original data At least continuation reference data indicating time may be prepared, and a combination thereof may be used to derive a larger number of drive data than the number of original data, start reference data, and continuation reference data.

  (33) The light emission data group 151 may not include the list data group 151e and the group data group 151f. In this case, the process for creating the light emission data can be simplified.

  (34) The sound output side priority may be set between the sound output data for notification. In this case, only the sound output data for notification having the highest priority may be output, and the sound output data for notification is sequentially output in the order according to the priority on the sound output side. It is good also as composition used as object. In this configuration, for example, among various events to be notified, notification regarding an act of illegally receiving a privilege is given, notification that the lower plate 47a is full, or the gaming machine main body 12 is released. Therefore, it is possible to prioritize the state notification of the pachinko machine 10 such as notification that it is being performed, and to promptly cope with fraudulent acts.

  (35) Instead of the notification area 162c of the light emission data area 162, there are an abnormality notification area for performing an abnormality notification when an event corresponding to an illegal act on the pachinko machine 10 occurs, and the state of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, a state notification area for performing state notification when an event other than the event corresponding to the illegal act occurs may be provided separately. In this case, the abnormality notification can be executed with the highest priority by making the light emission side priority of the abnormality notification area higher than the light emission side priority of the state notification area. In addition, by making the light emission side priority of the state notification area higher than the light emission side priority of the base area 162a and the interrupt area 162b, it becomes possible to execute the state notification in preference to the production. .

  (36) The display-side MPU 122 is limited to a configuration in which a command is transmitted to the sound-side MPU 112 according to the pattern data table at each timing during a period in which an effect corresponding to the pattern data table is being executed. Instead, after the pattern data table is read out, the command may be transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112 before starting the production according to the pattern data table. For example, a command for reading control data when starting an effect corresponding to the pattern data table is transmitted in advance before execution control of the effect is started in the display-side MPU 122, and thereafter The command may be transmitted again at a predetermined timing during the period in which the effect corresponding to the pattern data table is being executed.

  (37) The sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 may be provided on the same substrate. In this case, the VDP 125, the character ROM 126, and the video RAM 127 may be provided on the same substrate or may be provided on separate substrates.

  (38) While the special electric prize winning device 22 is closed, the special electric prize winning device 22 is completely closed. However, a part of the special electric prize winning device 22 may not be closed. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a game ball can win the special electric prize device 22 even if it is closed through the partial area, and the partial ball is closed because the partial area is narrower than the game ball. However, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a game ball cannot be awarded to the special electric prize winning device 22.

  (39) Instead of a configuration in which a game ball cannot be awarded to the lower operating port 24 while the main electric component 24a is closed, a game to the lower operating port 24 is performed even when the main electric component 24a is closed. It may be configured such that a winning of a ball can occur. However, the easiness of winning the prize needs to be lower than that during the opening of the general electric utility 24a.

  (40) The hold information acquired as a result of winning a prize at the upper operating port 23 and the hold information acquired as a result of winning a prize at the lower operating port 24 are stored separately, and the lower operating port A configuration in which the 24-side hold information is preferentially digested may be applied, and conversely, a configuration in which the hold information on the upper working port 23 side is preferentially digested may be applied. You may apply the structure digested in an acquisition order irrespective of whether it is the opening | mouth 23 or the lower action | operation opening 24. FIG.

  Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operation ports are not arranged vertically, but the first operation port corresponding to the upper operation port 23 and the second operation port corresponding to the lower operation port 24 are arranged on the left and right. It is good also as a structure arranged in parallel, It is good also as a structure in which these both operation ports were arranged in parallel diagonally. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which arrange | positions both operation openings apart so that only the winning to the 1st operation opening or the winning to the 2nd operation opening can be aimed according to the operation mode of the launching handle 41.

  In the above configuration, the special display unit 33 displays a first display area for displaying the result of determination of whether or not the hold information is acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23 and the winning to the lower working port 24. You may provide the 2nd display area which displays the result of the success / failure determination of the acquired hold information. In this case, the change display of the pattern in the first display area is based on whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. Is started and a stop result corresponding to the determination of the success / failure is displayed, and the change display for one game time is ended. In addition, the change display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area based on whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 24 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. At the same time, the stop result corresponding to the determination of success / failure is displayed, and the display of the variation of one game time is ended.

  (41) When the hold information acquired by winning a prize to the upper operating port 23 is a target of the determination of the success / failure, and the hold information acquired by winning a prize to the lower operating port 24 is a success / failure It is good also as a structure from which the profit which a player obtains differs with the case where it becomes the object of determination. For example, when the hold information on the upper working port 23 side is the target of the determination of the success / failure, the game results are distributed as in the above embodiment, but the hold information on the lower operation port 24 side is the target of the determination of the success / failure In the case of winning the jackpot, it may be configured to be distributed to either the most advantageous jackpot result, the explicit high probability big hit result, or the low probability big hit result.

  Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of operation ports are provided as in the above embodiment, the number of operation ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with only one working port.

  (42) When the main control device 90 is used as a reference, the display control device 120 is replaced with the sound emission control device 103 instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 103 is present upstream of the display control device 120 in the communication direction. It is good also as a structure which exists in the upstream of a communication direction rather than. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 103 and the display control device 120 are separately provided, both the control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the functions of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated into the main controller 90, and both functions of these two controllers may be integrated into the main controller 90. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 90 to the sound emission control device 103 and the configuration of commands output from the sound emission control device 103 to the display control device 120 are also arbitrary.

  (43) A device for performing a game-time effect is not limited to the symbol display device 31, and a configuration in which a game-time effect is performed by operating a decorative member provided in a movable manner. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. Good.

  (44) In each of the above embodiments, the special figure display unit 33 displays the stop result corresponding to each game result. However, instead of this, the special figure display unit 33 may be omitted. Even if it is a game result, it is good also as a structure by which a common stop result is displayed in the special figure display part 33, and a special result display part 33 displays a stop result at random in the special figure display part 33 as a result. From the display of 33, it is good also as a structure which cannot identify which game result it is.

  (45) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. First control means (sound light side MPU 112) for controlling first effect means (speaker unit 45, curtain plate movable unit 51, disk movable units 61a and 61b, light emitting unit groups 71 to 73);
Second control means (display side MPU 122) for controlling the second effect means (symbol display device 31);
With
The first control means and the second control means are capable of bidirectional communication,
The first control means is a first side execution means (in the sound light side MPU 112) that causes the first effect means to execute an effect during a predetermined period based on the transmission information transmitted by the second control means. A function of executing light emission control processing, sound output control processing and movable object control processing),
The second control means causes the second effect means to execute an effect in a period overlapping with at least a part of the predetermined period based on transmission information transmitted by the first control means. A gaming machine comprising a side execution means (function for executing task processing in the display side MPU 122).

  According to the characteristic A1, the first control unit controls the execution of the effect in the first effect unit based on the transmission information transmitted from the second control unit, and the second control unit determines the transmission information transmitted from the first control unit. Based on this, the execution of the effect in the second effect means is controlled. Thereby, when producing an effect in the same period in each of the first effect means and the second effect means, it is difficult for the effects of both to occur. As described above, in a configuration using a plurality of control means, control can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature A2. Comprising an operation receiving means (production operation device 48) for accepting the player's input operation;
Information on whether or not the input operation is accepted by the operation accepting means is configured to be input to the first control means,
The first control means can transmit operation correspondence transmission information (operation occurrence command) corresponding to the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means,
The second side executing means is a second side operation corresponding executing means for causing the second effect means to execute an effect corresponding thereto after the first control means transmits the operation corresponding transmission information. A function of executing the process of step S909 in the display-side MPU 122),
The second control means, when an effect corresponding to the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means is executed by the second effect means, executes transmission information (operation effect command) corresponding thereto. Can be sent,
The first side execution means is a first side operation corresponding execution means (sound) that causes the first effect means to execute an effect corresponding to the second control means after the second control means transmits the execution transmission information. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, further comprising: a function of executing the process of step S1306 in the optical MPU 112.

  According to the feature A2, in the configuration in which when the input operation is accepted by the operation accepting unit, the corresponding rendering is executed by each of the first rendering unit and the second rendering unit, the second control unit includes: After the control means transmits the operation corresponding transmission information, the second effect means performs an operation corresponding effect. In addition, the first control means first transmits the execution transmission information after the second control means transmits the execution transmission information. An effect corresponding to the operation is performed by the effect means. Thus, in the configuration in which the information indicating whether or not the input operation is accepted by the operation accepting means is input to the first control means, the first control means waits for the second control means to transmit the execution transmission information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a shift in each operation-compatible effect.

  Feature A3. The first control means starts monitoring whether or not an input operation is accepted by the operation accepting means when the second control means transmits operation monitoring transmission information (operation valid start command). The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the operation-compatible transmission information can be transmitted when an input operation is accepted by the operation receiving means during the monitoring period.

  According to the feature A3, the first control means only has to start monitoring whether the input operation is accepted by the operation accepting means when the second control means transmits the operation monitoring transmission information. It is not necessary for the means to uniquely specify the start timing of the monitoring. As a result, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced in a configuration that makes it difficult for deviations to occur in operation-related effects. Moreover, since the main body which determines the start timing of the various processes in a 1st control means is collected by the 2nd control means, the simplification of a process structure is achieved.

Feature A4. When the first control unit transmits the operation-compatible transmission information, the second control unit is configured to accept an input operation in the operation reception unit corresponding to the operation-compatible transmission information during the input operation valid period. Is provided with validity determining means (a function of executing the process of step S906 in the display side MPU 122).
The second side operation corresponding execution means generates an effect corresponding to the fact that the input operation is accepted by the operation receiving means after the validity determining means determines that the second operation means is effective. The gaming machine according to Feature A3, wherein the gaming machine is executed.

  According to the feature A4, it is determined not only in the first control means but also in the second control means whether the acceptance of the input operation in the operation accepting means is during the effective period of the input operation. As a result, the possibility that an effect corresponding to the operation is executed although the input operation to the operation receiving means is not performed during the effective period is reduced.

Feature A5. The second control means is capable of transmitting valid transmission information (operation valid command) when it is judged that the validity judging means is valid,
The first control means can transmit permission transmission information (execution permission command) when the second control means transmits the valid transmission information,
When the first control means transmits the permission transmission information, the second side operation corresponding execution means gives an effect corresponding to the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means to the second effect means. The gaming machine according to Feature A4, wherein the gaming machine is executed.

  According to the feature A5, since the operation corresponding effect is started under a clear situation that the two-way communication between the first control means and the second control means is normal, The possibility that an effect corresponding to the operation is executed although the input operation to the operation receiving means is not performed is reduced.

  Feature A6. The game according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the second control means is capable of transmitting transmission information that can specify a timing at which the first effect means executes the effect for the predetermined period. Machine.

  According to the feature A6, the first control means may perform the execution control of the effect of the first effect means in accordance with the execution timing of the effect determined by the second control means. There is no need to specify. As a result, in a configuration that makes it difficult for the effects of both to occur, the processing load is reduced compared to the case where the execution timing of the effects can be uniquely specified by each of the first control means and the second control means. Is planned.

Feature A7. The first effect means can execute any one of the contents of the plurality of kinds of effects as the effect of the predetermined period.
The gaming machine according to Feature A6, wherein the second control means is capable of transmitting transmission information in a manner capable of identifying the type of effect content to be executed as the effect of the predetermined period.

  According to the feature A7, the first control means not only follows the performance execution timing determined by the second control means, but also the content of the performance to be executed may follow the content determined by the second control means. The processing load can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the content of the effect is uniquely determined in one control means.

Feature A8. The second-side execution means performs the execution control of the effect in the second effect means every time the control execution timing comes.
The second control unit does not transmit the transmission information to the first control unit every time the control execution timing is reached, but transmits the transmission information to the first control unit at a timing corresponding to a predetermined control execution timing. The gaming machine according to Feature A6 or A7, which transmits information.

  According to the feature A8, in the configuration in which the execution timing of the effect is specified by the first control unit according to the transmission information transmitted from the second control unit, the second control unit transmits the transmission information every time the control execution timing is reached. Since the transmission information is transmitted when the predetermined control execution timing is reached, the transmission frequency of the transmission information in the second control means can be reduced. Thereby, the processing load of the second control means can be reduced.

Feature A9. The first control unit includes a lottery execution unit (a function of executing steps S603 to S605 in the sound light side MPU 112) for executing a lottery process.
In the first effect means, the effect in the predetermined period is performed with contents corresponding to the result of the lottery process,
In any one of features A1 to A8, wherein the second effect means is configured such that an effect in a period overlapping with at least a part of the predetermined period is performed with contents corresponding to the result of the lottery process. The gaming machine described.

  According to feature A9, in spite of the lottery process being executed in the first control means, the first control means waits for the second control means to transmit the transmission information and then the effect is executed. Since it is the structure to perform, it becomes possible to suppress that a shift | offset | difference arises in each effect in a 1st effect means and a 2nd effect means.

Feature A10. Providing progress control means (main MPU92) for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein the lottery execution unit executes the lottery process based on the content of transmission information transmitted by the progress control unit.

  According to the feature A10, when the progress control means is used as a reference, the first control means is located on the upstream side of the communication with respect to the second control means, but the first control means is the second control means. Since it is the structure that the production is executed after waiting for transmission information to be transmitted, it is possible to prevent the production of the first production means and the second production means from being shifted. It becomes.

Feature A11. A transmission control unit (main MPU 92) that transmits transmission information to the first control unit and does not transmit the transmission information to the second control unit;
In the first effect means, the effect in the predetermined period is performed with contents corresponding to the transmission information transmitted by the first control means,
The game according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein the second effect means is configured such that the effect during the predetermined period is performed with content corresponding to transmission information transmitted by the first control means. Machine.

  According to the feature A11, when the progress control means is used as a reference, the first control means is located on the upstream side of the communication with respect to the second control means, but the first control means is the second control means. Since it is the structure that the production is executed after waiting for transmission information to be transmitted, it is possible to prevent the production of the first production means and the second production means from being shifted. It becomes.

Feature A12. When the second start execution means is a predetermined start trigger, the second effect means is in a specific duration (during game play, opening / closing execution mode) that is a period overlapping with at least a part of the predetermined period. To execute a specific range effect (game play effect, effect for opening / closing execution mode),
The second control means includes a specific control information group (pattern data table, opening data) used for causing the second effect means to execute the specific range effect when the predetermined start trigger is reached. A second side setting means for setting a table) (function of executing the processing of step S802 and step S806 in the display side MPU 122),
The first side executing means is for causing the first effect means to execute an effect corresponding to the specific range effect in the specific duration.
The first control means is a first side setting means (sound light) for setting a control information group (light emission data, sound output data) used for causing the first effect means to execute an effect during the specific duration period. A function of executing a light emission data read process and a sound output data read process in the side MPU 112),
The first side setting means does not set the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed during the specific continuation period at a time, but the second control means sets the control information group for each of the specific continuation periods. Triggered by the transmission information being transmitted at the timing, means for setting a control information group corresponding to a part of the effect executed during the specific continuation period (light emission data is set in the interrupt area 162b in the sound light side MPU 112) A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein the gaming machine has a function and a function of setting sound output data from the final effect data group 152f.

  According to the feature A12, the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set on the second control means side. On the other hand, on the first control means side, the control information group corresponding to the whole is not set, and specific continuation is performed according to transmission information transmitted from the second control means at each timing during the specific continuation period. A part of control information group of effects executed during the period is set. As a result, the storage capacity required in the storage means for setting the control information group can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the whole is set on each of the first control means side and the second control means side. Is possible.

Feature A13. The specific range effect is a configuration that may include a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach display, etc.) with different aspects of the effect,
The gaming machine according to Feature A12, wherein the control information group corresponding to the part is set in association with the plurality of production ranges.

  According to the feature A13, it is possible to prevent the unit of the control information group from becoming too fine, and it is possible to moderately suppress the setting frequency of the control information group in the first control unit.

  Feature A14. The specific control information group includes information capable of specifying the control content at each control execution timing during the specific continuation period, and corresponds to the control execution timing toward the first control means. The gaming machine according to Feature A12 or A13, which includes a transmission timing of transmission information to be transmitted.

  According to the feature A14, the second control unit can perform the execution control of the specific range effect by referring to the specific control information group at each control execution timing, and transmit information directed to the first control unit. It is also possible to specify the execution timing. Therefore, the information to be referred to in the second control means is collected, and the processing load is reduced.

Feature A15. The second side execution means executes the specific range effect by the second effect means during the specific continuation period when the first control means transmits transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger. It is what
The second side setting means sets the specific control information group when the first control means transmits transmission information because of the predetermined start trigger. A gaming machine according to any one of A14.

  According to the feature A15, in the configuration for specifying that the first control means side is a predetermined start opportunity, the second setting of the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is performed. By adopting a configuration that is performed on the control means side, it is possible to distribute the processing load.

Feature A16. The first side setting means sends transmission information corresponding to starting the specific range effect in response to the transmission of transmission information by the first control means due to the predetermined start trigger. 2 means for setting a predetermined control information group (light emission data at the start of fluctuation, sound output data at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to the start of the specific range effect (step S1202 in the sound light side MPU 112) Function to execute the process of)
The game according to Feature A15, wherein the first-side execution means starts an effect corresponding to the specific range effect after the first-side setting means sets the predetermined control information group. Machine.

  According to the feature A16, in the configuration for specifying that the first control means side has a predetermined start opportunity, the first control means waits for the second control means to transmit the transmission information and then the specific range effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a shift in the start timing of the specific range effect.

Feature A17. The first control means includes
Notification specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the notification target event (function for executing the process of step S622 in the sound light side MPU 112);
Notification transmission means for transmitting the notification occurrence information to the second control means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means (the function of executing step S625 in the sound light side MPU 112) )When,
Notification execution means for notifying the first effect means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means, regardless of whether the second control means transmits transmission information or not. (Function for executing the processing of step S623, step S624, step S1602, and step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 112);
A gaming machine according to Feature A16, comprising:

  According to the feature A17, at the start of the specific range effect, it waits until transmission information is transmitted from the second control means, whereas when a notification target event occurs, transmission information is transmitted from the second control means. The first control means starts the notification independently without waiting until it is done. Thereby, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the first control means and the second control means, the notification can be started on the first rendering means side. It becomes possible.

Feature A18. Provided with a privilege lottery execution means (function to execute the processing of step S301 and step S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player,
The predetermined start opportunity is a case where the bonus lottery process is executed, and the specific range effect is executed when the bonus lottery process is executed.
The first control means stores and holds information on the result of the privilege lottery process that triggered the execution of a specific range effect during the specific continuation period in the specific continuation period. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A18, in the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is set by the second control means, the result of the privilege lottery process in the first control means Information is stored and held. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the first control unit performs the execution control of the effect according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control unit, the result of the privilege lottery process can be taken into account in the execution control of the effect.

Feature A19. The second control means is configured to transmit transmission information toward the first control means when the predetermined output timing of the specific duration is reached regardless of the result of the privilege lottery process.
When the transmission information is received, the first control means determines whether or not the execution of the benefit corresponding effect (determined effect) corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process (sound light) A function of executing the process of step S1205 in the side MPU 112),
The first side setting means is means for setting a control information group corresponding to the benefit corresponding effect (sound-side MPU 112) when the correspondence determining means determines that the result corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. The game machine according to feature A18, further comprising: a function of making an affirmative determination in step S1207 and executing the process of step S1208.

  According to the feature A19, the second control unit only needs to transmit the transmission information to the first control unit without taking into consideration the result of the privilege lottery process, so that the configuration for transmitting the transmission information is optimized. It is done. Further, in the first control means, information on the result of the privilege lottery process is stored and held, and after determining whether or not the transmission information transmitted by the second control means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. In order to perform the execution control of the effect, when the configuration for transmitting the transmission information for the second control means is optimized as described above, the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process on the first control means side Execution control can be performed.

Feature A20. The second control means can transmit transmission information corresponding to the contents of the effect to be performed by the second effect means,
When the second control means transmits transmission information corresponding to causing the second effect means to perform a specific effect (a definite effect), the first side setting means executes an effect corresponding to the specific effect. Regardless of whether or not the result corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, a means for setting a control information group corresponding to the transmission information (affirmative determination is made in step S1203 in the sound side MPU 112 and step S1208 is performed). The game machine according to Feature A19, further comprising:

  According to the feature A20, when the specific effect is performed by the second effect means, the first control means side, regardless of whether the content of the specific effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process Production execution control corresponding to the content of the specific production is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to prioritize that the contents of the effects match between the first effect means and the second effect means, and it is possible to make it difficult for the effects to shift.

  Feature A21. The first-side setting means can set a control information group corresponding to effects at different start timings during the specific continuation period from the content of one transmission information transmitted by the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A20, wherein:

  According to the feature A21, it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of the transmission information in the second control unit.

  Feature A22. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, wherein the second effect means is display means (symbol display device 31) having a display surface.

  In the configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In particular, when the configuration of the feature A12 is provided, a control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is set by the second control means on the display control side of the display means. Therefore, even if some kind of communication abnormality occurs, it is possible to continue updating the display on the display means. Since the effect on the display means is easily noticed by the player, the update of the display on the display means is continued, so that the influence when a communication abnormality occurs is reduced.

  Feature A23. The game machine according to Feature A22, wherein the first effect means is at least one of sound output means (speaker unit 45) and light emitting means (light emitting unit groups 71 to 73).

  In the configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface and the effect is executed by at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  Here, the processing load of the sound output control of the sound output means or the light emission control of the light emitting means is lower than the display control of the display means. In this case, in the configuration including the feature A2, information indicating whether or not the input operation is accepted by the operation receiving unit is input to the first control unit that controls at least one of the sound output unit and the light emitting unit. . This eliminates the need to monitor the operation receiving means in the second control means on the relatively high processing load side, thereby reducing the processing load on the second control means.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. First control means (sound light side MPU 112) for controlling first effect means (speaker unit 45, curtain plate movable unit 51, disk movable units 61a and 61b, light emitting unit groups 71 to 73);
Second control means (display side MPU 122) for controlling the second effect means (symbol display device 31);
With
The second control means includes
When a predetermined start is triggered, a specific range effect (game play effect, effect for opening / closing execution mode) is executed by the second effect means during a specified duration (during game play, opening / closing execution mode). Second-side execution means (function to execute task processing in the display-side MPU 122),
A second set of specific control information groups (pattern data table, opening data table) used for causing the second effect means to execute the specific range effect when the predetermined start trigger occurs. Side setting means (function of executing the processing of step S802 and step S806 in the display side MPU 122),
With
The first control means includes
First side execution means (executes light emission control processing, sound output control processing, and movable object control processing in the sound light side MPU 112) that causes the first performance means to perform an effect corresponding to the specific range effect in the specific duration period. Function)
First side setting means (reading of light emission data in the sound light side MPU 112) for setting a control information group (light emission data, sound output data) used for causing the first effect means to execute an effect during the specific duration period. Processing and a function of executing sound output data reading processing),
With
The first side setting means does not set the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed during the specific continuation period at a time, but the second control means sets the control information group for each of the specific continuation periods. Triggered by the transmission information being transmitted at the timing, means for setting a control information group corresponding to a part of the effect executed during the specific continuation period (light emission data is set in the interrupt area 162b in the sound light side MPU 112) And a function of setting sound output data from the final effect data group 152f.

  According to the feature B1, since the first control means is configured to perform the execution control of the effect of the first effect means according to the transmission information output each time from the second control means, the first effect means and the second effect means In the case where the effects are executed in the same period, it is difficult for the two effects to be shifted.

  In this case, the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set on the second control means side. On the other hand, on the first control means side, the control information group corresponding to the whole is not set, and specific continuation is performed according to transmission information transmitted from the second control means at each timing during the specific continuation period. A part of control information group of effects executed during the period is set. As a result, the storage capacity required in the storage means for setting the control information group can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the whole is set on each of the first control means side and the second control means side. Is possible.

  As described above, in a configuration using a plurality of control means, control can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature B2. The specific range effect is a configuration that may include a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach display, etc.) with different aspects of the effect,
The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the control information group corresponding to the part is set in correspondence with the plurality of production ranges.

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to suppress the unit of the control information group from becoming too fine, and it is possible to moderately suppress the setting frequency of the control information group in the first control unit.

  Feature B3. The specific control information group includes information capable of specifying the control content at each control execution timing during the specific continuation period, and corresponds to the control execution timing toward the first control means. The gaming machine according to Feature B1 or B2, which includes transmission timing of transmission information to be transmitted.

  According to the feature B3, the second control unit can perform the execution control of the specific range effect by referring to the specific control information group at each control execution timing, and transmit information directed to the first control unit. It is also possible to specify the execution timing. Therefore, the information to be referred to in the second control means is collected, and the processing load is reduced.

Feature B4. The second side execution means executes the specific range effect by the second effect means during the specific continuation period when the first control means transmits transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger. It is what
The second side setting means is configured to set the specific control information group when the first control means transmits transmission information when the predetermined start timing is reached. A gaming machine according to any one of B3.

  According to the feature B4, in the configuration for specifying that the first control means side is a predetermined start opportunity, the second setting of the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is performed. By adopting a configuration that is performed on the control means side, it is possible to distribute the processing load.

Feature B5. The first side setting means sends transmission information corresponding to starting the specific range effect in response to the transmission of transmission information by the first control means due to the predetermined start trigger. 2 means for setting a predetermined control information group (light emission data at the start of fluctuation, sound output data at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to the start of the specific range effect (step S1202 in the sound light side MPU 112) Function to execute the process of)
The game according to Feature B4, wherein the first-side execution means starts an effect corresponding to the specific range effect after the first-side setting means sets the predetermined control information group. Machine.

  According to the feature B5, in the configuration for specifying that the first control means side has a predetermined start opportunity, the first control means waits for the second control means to transmit the transmission information and then the specific range effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a shift in the start timing of the specific range effect.

Feature B6. The first control means includes
Notification specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the notification target event (function for executing the process of step S622 in the sound light side MPU 112);
Notification transmission means for transmitting the notification occurrence information to the second control means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means (the function of executing step S625 in the sound light side MPU 112) )When,
Notification execution means for notifying the first effect means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means, regardless of whether the second control means transmits transmission information or not. (Function for executing the processing of step S623, step S624, step S1602, and step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 112);
A gaming machine according to Feature B5, characterized in that

  According to the feature B6, at the start of the specific range effect, it waits until the transmission information is transmitted from the second control unit, whereas when the notification target event occurs, the transmission information is transmitted from the second control unit. The first control means starts the notification independently without waiting until it is done. Thereby, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the first control means and the second control means, the notification can be started on the first rendering means side. It becomes possible.

Feature B7. Provided with a privilege lottery execution means (function to execute the processing of step S301 and step S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player,
The predetermined start opportunity is a case where the bonus lottery process is executed, and the specific range effect is executed when the bonus lottery process is executed.
The first control means stores and holds information on the result of the privilege lottery process that triggered the execution of a specific range effect during the specific continuation period in the specific continuation period. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature B7, in the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is set by the second control means, the result of the privilege lottery process in the first control means Information is stored and held. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the first control unit performs the execution control of the effect according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control unit, the result of the privilege lottery process can be taken into account in the execution control of the effect.

Feature B8. The second control means is configured to transmit transmission information toward the first control means when the predetermined output timing of the specific duration is reached regardless of the result of the privilege lottery process.
When the transmission information is received, the first control means determines whether or not the execution of the benefit corresponding effect (determined effect) corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process (sound light) A function of executing the process of step S1205 in the side MPU 112),
The first side setting means is means for setting a control information group corresponding to the benefit corresponding effect (sound-side MPU 112) when the correspondence determining means determines that it corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature B7, further comprising: a function of making an affirmative determination in step S1207 and executing the process of step S1208.

  According to the feature B8, the second control unit only needs to transmit the transmission information to the first control unit without taking into consideration the result of the privilege lottery process, so that the configuration for transmitting the transmission information is optimized. It is done. Further, in the first control means, information on the result of the privilege lottery process is stored and held, and after determining whether or not the transmission information transmitted by the second control means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. In order to perform the execution control of the effect, when the configuration for transmitting the transmission information for the second control means is optimized as described above, the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process on the first control means side Execution control can be performed.

Feature B9. The second control means can transmit transmission information corresponding to the contents of the effect to be performed by the second effect means,
When the second control means transmits transmission information corresponding to causing the second effect means to perform a specific effect (a definite effect), the first side setting means executes an effect corresponding to the specific effect. Regardless of whether or not the result corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, a means for setting a control information group corresponding to the transmission information (affirmative determination is made in step S1203 in the sound side MPU 112 and step S1208 is performed). The gaming machine according to Feature B8, which includes a function of executing the process (1).

  According to the feature B9, when the specific effect is performed by the second effect means, the first control means side, regardless of whether or not the content of the specific effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process Production execution control corresponding to the content of the specific production is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to prioritize that the contents of the effects match between the first effect means and the second effect means, and it is possible to make it difficult for the effects to shift.

  Feature B10. The first-side setting means can set a control information group corresponding to effects at different start timings during the specific continuation period from the content of one transmission information transmitted by the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, wherein:

  According to the feature B10, it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of the transmission information in the second control unit.

  Feature B11. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein the second effect means is display means (symbol display device 31) having a display surface.

  In the configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In particular, since the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is set in the second control means on the display control side of the display means, even if some communication abnormality occurs, It is possible to continue updating the display on the display means. Since the effect on the display means is easily noticed by the player, the update of the display on the display means is continued, so that the influence when a communication abnormality occurs is reduced.

  Feature B12. The game machine according to Feature B11, wherein the first effect means is at least one of sound output means (speaker part 45) and light emitting means (light emitting part groups 71 to 73).

  In the configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface and the effect is executed by at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. First control means (sound light side MPU 112) for controlling first effect means (speaker unit 45, curtain plate movable unit 51, disk movable units 61a and 61b, light emitting unit groups 71 to 73);
Second control means (display side MPU 122) for controlling the second effect means (symbol display device 31);
With
The first control means is a first-side execution means (sound light) that causes the first effect means to execute an effect during a specific continuation period (during game play, opening / closing execution mode) when a predetermined start timing is reached. A function of executing light emission control processing, sound output control processing and movable object control processing in the side MPU 112),
The second control means includes
Second side setting means (in the display side MPU 122) for setting a specific control information group (pattern data table, opening data table) used for causing the second effect means to execute the effect during the specific duration. The function of executing the processing of step S802 and step S806),
Second side execution means for causing the second effect means to execute an effect during the specific duration by using information corresponding to the control execution timing in the specific control information group at each control execution timing. (Function for executing task processing in the display-side MPU 122);
In accordance with the progress of the specific duration period in the second rendering means, second transmission means for transmitting transmission information to the first control means (command setting processing in the display-side MPU 122 is executed) Function)
With
The first side executing means uses the transmission information transmitted by the second side transmitting means, and uses the transmission information transmitted from the second effect means to produce the contents of the effect to be executed by the first effect means during the specific duration period. Can be adapted to the content,
The second side transmission means does not transmit transmission information to the first control means every time the control execution timing is reached, but transmits transmission information to the first control means at a timing corresponding to a predetermined control execution timing. A gaming machine that is characterized by transmitting a message.

  According to the feature C1, the first control means uses the transmission information transmitted from the second control means, and the contents of the effects to be executed by the first effect means during the specific continuation period are the contents of the effects in the second effect means. Therefore, when the production is executed in the same period in each of the first production means and the second production means, it is difficult for both productions to be shifted.

  In this case, since the second control unit is configured to transmit the transmission information at the predetermined control execution timing, instead of transmitting the transmission information every time the control execution timing is reached, the second control unit It is possible to reduce the transmission frequency of transmission information in Thereby, the processing load of the second control means can be reduced.

  As described above, in a configuration using a plurality of control means, control can be performed satisfactorily.

  Feature C2. The specific control information group includes information capable of specifying the control content at each control execution timing during the specific continuation period, and corresponds to the control execution timing toward the first control means. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, which includes transmission timing of transmission information to be transmitted.

  According to the feature C2, the second control unit can perform the execution control of the production during the specific continuation period by referring to the specific control information group at each control execution timing, and toward the first control unit. It is also possible to specify the execution timing of the transmission information. Therefore, information to be referred to in the second control means is collected, and the processing load is reduced.

Feature C3. The specific range effect (game play effect, effect for opening / closing execution mode) executed during the specific duration in the second effect means includes a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach) with different effects. Display) etc., and
The game according to C1 or C2, wherein the second-side transmission unit transmits the transmission information so that the first control unit can specify the start timing of each production range. Machine.

  According to the feature C3, since the 2nd control means should just transmit transmission information according to each production range, it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of transmission information. Moreover, in the 1st control means, when making the content of the effect performed by the 1st effect means correspond to the content of the effect in the 2nd effect means according to the transmission information which a 2nd control means transmits, each effect range Since it is only necessary to perform adjustment in units, it is easy to perform the adjustment.

  Feature C4. Any of the features C1 to C3, wherein the first side executing means grasps the contents of the effect to be executed during the specific duration from the transmission information transmitted by the second side transmitting means. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature C4, the first control means not only causes the contents of the effect to be executed by the first effect means according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control means but also corresponds to the contents of the effect in the second effect means. Since the contents of the effect to be executed need only follow the contents determined by the second control means, the processing load can be reduced compared to the configuration in which the contents of the effect are uniquely determined by the first control means.

  Feature C5. The first control means does not set the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed during the specific duration, but the second control means determines each timing during the specific duration. Triggered by the transmission information transmitted in step 1, the first side setting means for setting a control information group corresponding to a part of the effect executed during the specific duration period (light emission data in the interrupt area 162b in the sound side MPU 112) And a function for setting sound output data from the final effect data group 152f). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein:

  According to the feature C5, the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set on the second control means side. On the other hand, on the first control means side, the control information group corresponding to the whole is not set, and specific continuation is performed according to transmission information transmitted from the second control means at each timing during the specific continuation period. A part of control information group of effects executed during the period is set. As a result, the storage capacity required in the storage means for setting the control information group can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the whole is set on each of the first control means side and the second control means side. Is possible.

Feature C6. The specific range effect (game play effect, effect for opening / closing execution mode) executed during the specific duration in the second effect means includes a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach) with different effects. Display) etc., and
The gaming machine according to Feature C5, wherein the control information group corresponding to the part is set in correspondence with the plurality of production ranges.

  According to the feature C6, the unit of the control information group can be prevented from becoming too fine, and the setting frequency of the control information group in the first control unit can be moderately suppressed.

Feature C7. The second execution means causes the second effect means to execute a specific range effect in the specific duration when the first control means transmits transmission information because the predetermined start trigger has been reached. Is,
The second side setting means is configured to set the specific control information group when the first control means transmits transmission information when the predetermined start timing is reached. C5 Or the game machine as described in C6.

  According to the feature C7, in the configuration that specifies that the first control means side is a predetermined start trigger, the second setting of the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is performed. By adopting a configuration that is performed on the control means side, it is possible to distribute the processing load.

Feature C8. The first side setting means sends transmission information corresponding to starting the specific range effect in response to the transmission of transmission information by the first control means due to the predetermined start trigger. 2 means for setting a predetermined control information group (light emission data at the start of fluctuation, sound output data at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to the start of the specific range effect (step S1202 in the sound light side MPU 112) Function to execute the process of)
The game according to Feature C7, wherein the first-side execution means starts an effect corresponding to the specific range effect after the first-side setting means sets the predetermined control information group. Machine.

  According to the feature C8, in the configuration in which the first control means side specifies that a predetermined start trigger is given, the first control means waits for the second control means to transmit the transmission information and then the specific range effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a shift in the start timing of the specific range effect.

Feature C9. The first control means includes
Notification specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the notification target event (function for executing the process of step S622 in the sound light side MPU 112);
Notification transmission means for transmitting the notification occurrence information to the second control means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means (the function of executing step S625 in the sound light side MPU 112) )When,
Notification execution means for notifying the first effect means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means, regardless of whether the second control means transmits transmission information or not. (Function for executing the processing of step S623, step S624, step S1602, and step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 112);
The gaming machine according to Feature C8, comprising:

  According to the feature C9, at the start of the specific range effect, it waits until the transmission information is transmitted from the second control unit, whereas when the notification target event occurs, the transmission information is transmitted from the second control unit. The first control means starts the notification independently without waiting until it is done. Thereby, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the first control means and the second control means, the notification can be started on the first rendering means side. It becomes possible.

Feature C10. Provided with a privilege lottery execution means (function to execute the processing of step S301 and step S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player,
The predetermined start opportunity is a case where the bonus lottery process is executed, and an effect during the specific duration is executed when the bonus lottery process is executed.
Any of the features C5 to C9, wherein the first control means stores and holds information on a result of the privilege lottery process that triggered the execution of the effect during the specific duration in the specific duration A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature C10, in the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set in the second control means, the result of the privilege lottery process in the first control means Information is stored and held. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the first control unit performs the execution control of the effect according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control unit, the result of the privilege lottery process can be taken into account in the execution control of the effect.

Feature C11. The second control means is configured to transmit transmission information toward the first control means when the predetermined output timing of the specific duration is reached regardless of the result of the privilege lottery process.
When the transmission information is received, the first control means determines whether or not the execution of the benefit corresponding effect (determined effect) corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process ( A function of executing the process of step S1205 in the sound light side MPU 112),
The first side setting means, when it is determined in the correspondence determination means that the content of the effect corresponding to the transmission information corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, the control information corresponding to the transmission information The gaming machine according to Feature C10, further comprising means for setting a group (a function of making an affirmative determination in Step S1207 in the sound light side MPU 112 and executing the processing in Step S1208).

  According to the feature C11, the second control unit only needs to transmit the transmission information to the first control unit without taking into consideration the result of the privilege lottery process, so that the configuration for transmitting the transmission information is optimized. It is done. Further, in the first control means, information on the result of the privilege lottery process is stored and held, and after determining whether or not the transmission information transmitted by the second control means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. In order to perform the execution control of the effect, when the configuration for transmitting the transmission information for the second control means is optimized as described above, the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process on the first control means side Execution control can be performed.

Feature C12. The second control means can transmit transmission information corresponding to the contents of the effect to be performed by the second effect means,
When the second control means transmits transmission information corresponding to causing the second effect means to perform a specific effect (a definite effect), the first side setting means executes an effect corresponding to the specific effect. Regardless of whether or not the result corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, a means for setting a control information group corresponding to the transmission information (affirmative determination is made in step S1203 in the sound side MPU 112 and step S1208 is performed). The game machine according to Feature C11, further comprising:

  According to the feature C12, when the specific effect is performed by the second effect means, the first control means side, regardless of whether or not the content of the specific effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process Production execution control corresponding to the content of the specific production is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to prioritize that the contents of the effects match between the first effect means and the second effect means, and it is possible to make it difficult for the effects to shift.

  Feature C13. The first-side setting means can set a control information group corresponding to effects at different start timings during the specific continuation period from the content of one transmission information transmitted by the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C12.

  According to the feature C13, it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of the transmission information in the second control unit.

  Feature C14. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, wherein the second effect means is display means (symbol display device 31) having a display surface.

  In the configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In particular, when the configuration of the feature C5 is provided, a control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is set in the second control means on the display control side of the display means. Therefore, even if some kind of communication abnormality occurs, it is possible to continue updating the display on the display means. Since the effect on the display means is easily noticed by the player, the update of the display on the display means is continued, so that the influence when a communication abnormality occurs is reduced.

  Feature C15. The game machine according to Feature C14, wherein the first effect means is at least one of sound output means (speaker unit 45) and light emitting means (light emitting unit groups 71 to 73).

  In the configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface and the effect is executed by at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. First control means (sound light side MPU 112) for controlling first effect means (speaker unit 45, curtain plate movable unit 51, disk movable units 61a and 61b, light emitting unit groups 71 to 73);
Second control means (display side MPU 122) for controlling the second effect means (symbol display device 31);
With
The second control means transmits second transmission means (display-side MPU 122) that transmits predetermined transmission information to the first control means in accordance with the progress of the effect being executed by the second effect means. The function to execute command setting processing in
The first control means includes
Specifying means (function for executing the process of step S1204 in the sound light side MPU 112) for specifying that it is a predetermined timing when the second transmission means transmits the predetermined transmission information;
When the specifying means specifies that it is a predetermined timing, at least using information different from the information included in the predetermined transmission information (game result information stored in the holding data area 161), the predetermined effect Whether or not to execute (determined effect), and content determining means for determining at least one of the contents of the predetermined effect (determined effect) (a function for executing the processing in steps S1205 and S1206 in the sound light side MPU 112);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, the first control means has a predetermined timing based on the predetermined transmission information transmitted from the second control means in accordance with the progress of the effect executed by the second effect means. Since the execution control of the effect of the first effect means is specified, when the effect is executed in the same period by each of the first effect means and the second effect means, there is a difference between both effects. It becomes difficult to occur.

  In this case, if the first control means specifies the predetermined timing, whether or not to execute the predetermined effect by using at least information different from the information included in the transmission information, and the predetermined effect. Determine at least one of the contents. Thereby, the predetermined transmission information only needs to include information that makes the first control means recognize that it is the predetermined timing, and includes information on whether or not to execute the predetermined effect and information on the content of the predetermined effect. There is no need. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the predetermined transmission information, reduce the processing load of the second control means, and facilitate the design while making the contents of the effects in the first effect means appropriate. .

  As described above, in a configuration using a plurality of control means, control can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature D2. Provided with a privilege lottery execution means (function to execute the processing of step S301 and step S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player,
The information different from the information included in the predetermined transmission information includes information on the result of the bonus lottery process (game result information stored in the holding data area 161). Game machines.

  According to the feature D2, in the configuration in which the first control unit determines whether or not to execute the predetermined effect in response to transmission information being transmitted from the second control unit, and at least one of the contents of the predetermined effect. The result of the privilege lottery process can be taken into account when performing the execution control.

Feature D3. The content determining means includes
Correspondence determination means for determining whether or not the execution of the benefit-corresponding effect (determined effect) as the predetermined effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process when the specifying means specifies the predetermined timing. (Function for executing the process of step S1205 in the sound light side MPU 112);
When it is determined that the correspondence determination means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, the first side setting means (step S1208 in the sound light side MPU 112) sets the control information group corresponding to the privilege correspondence effect. Processing function), and
First side execution means (light emission control processing, sound output control processing and movable object in the sound light side MPU 112) that performs execution control of the production of the first effect means using the control information group set by the first side setting means Control processing)
The gaming machine according to Feature D2, further comprising:

  According to the feature D3, the second control unit may transmit the transmission information to the first control unit without taking into consideration the result of the privilege lottery process. Therefore, the configuration for transmitting the transmission information is optimized. It is done. In addition, since the first control means determines whether or not the transmission information transmitted by the second control means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, the execution control of the effect is performed as described above. When the configuration for transmitting the transmission information is optimized for the control means, it is possible to perform the execution control of the production corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process on the first control means side.

  Feature D4. The first side setting means, when the second side transmission means transmits transmission information corresponding to causing the second effect means to perform a specific effect (definite effect), an effect corresponding to the specific effect Regardless of whether or not the execution corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, the means for setting the control information group corresponding to the transmission information (affirmative determination is made in step S1203 in the sound-side MPU 112 and the step is performed) The gaming machine according to Feature D3, which includes a function of executing the processing of S1208.

  According to the feature D4, when the specific effect is performed by the second effect means, the first control means side regardless of whether or not the content of the specific effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. Production execution control corresponding to the content of the specific production is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to prioritize that the contents of the effects match between the first effect means and the second effect means, and it is possible to make it difficult for the effects to shift.

  Feature D5. The identification unit can identify the timing corresponding to execution of an effect different from the predetermined effect from the content of the predetermined transmission information, according to any one of the features D1 to D4, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D5, it is possible to consolidate information into one predetermined transmission information, and it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of the predetermined transmission information.

Feature D6. The second control means includes
When a predetermined start is triggered, a specific range effect (game play effect, effect for opening / closing execution mode) is executed by the second effect means during a specified duration (during game play, opening / closing execution mode). Second-side execution means (function to execute task processing in the display-side MPU 122),
A second set of specific control information groups (pattern data table, opening data table) used for causing the second effect means to execute the specific range effect when the predetermined start trigger occurs. Side setting means (function of executing the processing of step S802 and step S806 in the display side MPU 122),
With
The specific control information group includes information capable of specifying the control content at each control execution timing during the specific continuation period, and corresponds to the control execution timing toward the first control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein a transmission timing of transmission information to be transmitted is included.

  According to the feature D6, the second control unit can perform the production execution control during the specific duration by referring to the specific control information group at each control execution timing, and to the first control unit. It is also possible to specify the execution timing of the transmission information. Therefore, information to be referred to in the second control means is collected, and the processing load is reduced.

Feature D7. The specific range effect executed during the specific duration in the second effect means may include a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach display, etc.) having different effects.
The gaming machine according to claim D6, wherein the second-side transmission unit transmits the transmission information so that the first control unit can specify the start timing of each production range.

  According to the feature D7, since the 2nd control means should just transmit transmission information according to each production range, it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of transmission information. Moreover, in the 1st control means, when making the content of the effect performed by the 1st effect means correspond to the content of the effect in the 2nd effect means according to the transmission information which a 2nd control means transmits, each effect range Since it is only necessary to perform adjustment in units, it is easy to perform the adjustment.

  Feature D8. The first control means does not set the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed during the specific duration, but the second control means determines each timing during the specific duration. Triggered by transmitting the transmission information at the first side setting means (sound light side MPU 112) for setting control information group (light emission data, sound output data) corresponding to a part of the effect executed during the specific continuation period The gaming machine according to D6 or D7, further comprising a function of setting light emission data in the interrupting area 162b and a function of setting sound output data from the final effect data group 152f.

  According to the feature D8, the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set on the second control means side. On the other hand, on the first control means side, the control information group corresponding to the whole is not set, and specific continuation is performed according to transmission information transmitted from the second control means at each timing during the specific continuation period. A part of control information group of effects executed during the period is set. As a result, the storage capacity required in the storage means for setting the control information group can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the whole is set on each of the first control means side and the second control means side. Is possible.

Feature D9. The specific range effect executed during the specific duration in the second effect means may include a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach display, etc.) having different effects.
The gaming machine according to Feature D8, wherein the control information group corresponding to the part is set in correspondence with the plurality of production ranges.

  According to the feature D9, it is possible to suppress the unit of the control information group from being too fine, and it is possible to moderately suppress the setting frequency of the control information group in the first control unit.

Feature D10. The second execution means causes the second effect means to execute a specific range effect in the specific duration when the first control means transmits transmission information because the predetermined start trigger has been reached. Is,
The second side setting means is configured to set the specific control information group when the first control means transmits transmission information when the predetermined start timing is reached. Or the game machine as described in D9.

  According to the feature D10, in the configuration that specifies that the first control means side is a predetermined start opportunity, the second setting of the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is performed. By adopting a configuration that is performed on the control means side, it is possible to distribute the processing load.

Feature D11. The first side setting means sends transmission information corresponding to starting the specific range effect in response to the transmission of transmission information by the first control means due to the predetermined start trigger. 2 means for setting a predetermined control information group (light emission data at the start of fluctuation, sound output data at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to the start of the specific range effect (step S1202 in the sound light side MPU 112) Function to execute the process of)
The game according to Feature D10, wherein the first-side execution means starts an effect corresponding to the specific range effect after the first-side setting means sets the predetermined control information group. Machine.

  According to the feature D11, in the configuration in which the first control means side specifies that the predetermined start trigger has been specified, the first control means waits for the second control means to transmit the transmission information and then the specific range effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a shift in the start timing of the specific range effect.

Feature D12. The first control means includes
Notification specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the notification target event (function for executing the process of step S622 in the sound light side MPU 112);
Notification transmission means for transmitting the notification occurrence information to the second control means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means (the function of executing step S625 in the sound light side MPU 112) )When,
Notification execution means for notifying the first effect means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means, regardless of whether the second control means transmits transmission information or not. (Function for executing the processing of step S623, step S624, step S1602, and step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 112);
A gaming machine according to Feature D11, comprising:

  According to the feature D12, when the specific range effect is started, the second control unit waits until transmission information is transmitted, whereas when a notification target event occurs, the transmission information is transmitted from the second control unit. The first control means starts the notification independently without waiting until it is done. Thereby, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the first control means and the second control means, the notification can be started on the first rendering means side. It becomes possible.

  Feature D13. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D12, wherein the second effect means is display means (symbol display device 31) having a display surface.

  In the configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In particular, when the configuration of the feature D6 is provided, a control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is set in the second control means on the display control side of the display means. Therefore, even if some kind of communication abnormality occurs, it is possible to continue updating the display on the display means. Since the effect on the display means is easily noticed by the player, the update of the display on the display means is continued, so that the influence when a communication abnormality occurs is reduced.

  Feature D14. The game machine according to Feature D13, wherein the first effect means is at least one of sound output means (speaker unit 45) and light emitting means (light emitting unit groups 71 to 73).

  In the configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface and the effect is executed by at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  The invention of the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, and the feature D group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. As these gaming machines, a configuration in which a presentation is performed using a plurality of types of presentation devices is known.

  For example, a configuration in which a presentation is performed using at least a display device such as a liquid crystal display device and a speaker is known. In this case, a sound corresponding to display content on the display device is output from the speaker. Further, for example, a configuration is known in which an effect is produced using at least a light emitting unit such as an LED and a speaker. In this case, the light emitting unit is controlled with a lighting pattern corresponding to the content of sound output from the speaker. . In addition, for example, a configuration in which an effect is produced using at least the display device and the movable object is known. In this case, the operation of the movable object is started according to the display content on the display device.

  In a configuration in which a presentation is performed using a plurality of types of presentation devices as in the above examples, the processing load is distributed by changing the control means for controlling the execution of the presentation between a predetermined presentation device and a specific presentation device. It becomes possible. In this case, in a configuration using a plurality of control means, a configuration capable of performing good control is required.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Production means (light emitting unit groups 71 to 73) capable of performing production,
Information setting means (in the sound light side MPU 112) for setting the control information group (light emission data) used for executing the effect in the effect means so as to be usable when performing the execution control of the effect means. A function for executing the process of reading the emission data), and
Execution means (in the sound light side MPU 112) that causes the effect means to execute an effect during a predetermined period by using information corresponding to the control execution timing in the control information group when the control execution timing is reached. Function to execute the light emission control process),
With
The information setting means includes
Source information reading means (steps S1402, S1406, S1409 and S1415 in the sound light side MPU 112) for reading the original information (pallet data) used for setting the control information group from the storage means (sound light side ROM 113). Processing function), and
Deriving means for deriving the control information group by applying setting information (start position information, duration data) to the original information read by the original information reading means (executes data expansion processing in the sound light side MPU 112) Function)
With
The derivation means can derive different control information groups by applying different setting information to the original information.

  According to the feature E1, different control information groups are derived by applying different setting information to the original information. This reduces the storage capacity required in the storage means compared to a configuration in which different control information groups are stored in the storage means at the gaming machine manufacturing stage for each type of effect executed during a predetermined period. Is possible. As described above, it is possible to suitably perform the execution control.

Feature E2. The derivation means includes
Means for applying the first setting information (start position number) to the original information (function for executing the process of step S1504 in the sound light side MPU 112);
Means for applying the second setting information (duration data) to the original information (function for executing the process of step S1505 in the sound light side MPU 112);
With
The storage means includes type relationship information (data selection table) that defines a correspondence relationship between the original information to be used, the type of the first setting information applied to the original information, and the type of the second setting information. 151g) is stored in the gaming machine according to Feature E1.

  According to the feature E2, since the control information group is derived by applying at least the first setting information and the second setting information to the original information, the control information derived from one original information It is possible to diversify the group. In this case, the storage unit stores in advance the type relationship information that defines the correspondence between the source information to be used, the type of first setting information applied to the source information, and the type of second setting information. Since it is a structure, simplification of the process for specifying the correspondence of original information and each setting information is achieved.

Feature E3. A plurality of the original information is stored in the storage means,
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein there are a plurality of setting information applicable to one original information.

  According to the feature E3, diversification of the control information group can be realized while suppressing the storage capacity required in the storage unit.

  Feature E4. The storage means stores correspondence information (start position data group 151b) that defines the correspondence between the original information to be used and the setting information applied to the original information. A gaming machine according to E3.

  According to the feature E4, the process for specifying the correspondence between the original information and the setting information can be simplified.

Feature E5. In the original information, the contents of the switching destination when the contents of the effects in the effecting means are sequentially switched are defined,
The deriving means indicates, as the setting information, a start criterion indicating which of the plurality of switching destination contents defined in the original information is to be used to start the rendering in the rendering means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, further comprising means for applying information (starting position number) (a function of executing the processing of step S1504 in the sound light side MPU 112).

  According to the feature E5, it is possible to derive a plurality of control information groups from one original information by a simple method of different starting reference information, and diversification of the control information groups while suppressing the storage capacity. This can be realized while simplifying the design.

Feature E6. In the original information, the contents of the switching destination when the contents of the effects in the effecting means are sequentially switched are defined,
The derivation means applies, as the setting information, continuation reference information (duration data) indicating a continuation period when each content of the switching destination defined in the original information is continued (on the sound side) The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, further comprising: a function of executing the process of step S1505 in the MPU 112).

  According to the feature E6, it is possible to derive a plurality of control information groups from one original information by a simple method of different continuation reference information, and diversification of the control information groups while suppressing the storage capacity. This can be realized while simplifying the design.

Feature E7. The effect means includes a plurality of unit effect means (LEDs 71a to 73a),
The derivation means uses the same original information for the plurality of unit presentation means, and differs for at least the first unit presentation means and the second unit presentation means among the plurality of unit presentation means. It is characterized by comprising first deriving means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1502 to S1508 in the sound light side MPU 112) to derive different control information groups by applying information. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E6.

  According to the feature E7, it is possible to derive different control information groups in the plurality of unit rendering means while using the same original information. As a result, the same original information can be used even when different effects are executed among a plurality of unit effect means, so that it is possible to diversify the effects while suppressing the storage capacity.

Feature E8. The effect means includes a plurality of unit effect means (LEDs 71a to 73a),
The derivation means includes
First derivation means (function for executing the processing of steps S1502 to S1508 in the sound light side MPU 112) using the same original information for the plurality of unit effect means;
Second derivation means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1510 to S1518 in the sound light side MPU 112) using the original information which is different for some of the unit effect means among the plurality of unit effect means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, comprising:

  According to the feature E8, it is possible to switch between a simple effect mode and a complex effect mode only by changing the number of pieces of original information used for a plurality of unit effect means.

  Feature E9. The second deriving unit applies the application target information (list data, group data) indicating the type of the original information to be applied to each of the plurality of unit presentation units as the setting information (sound side MPU 112). The game machine according to Feature E8, further comprising: a function of executing the processes of Step S1511 and Step S1512 in FIG.

  According to the feature E9, when applying different original information among a plurality of unit rendering means, it is only necessary to refer to the application target information, and thus the application process can be simplified.

Feature E10. The effect means is a light emitting means,
The control information group is for determining a light emission pattern of the light emitting means during the predetermined period,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, wherein the original information includes a content of a switching destination when light emitting content in the light emitting unit is sequentially switched.

  According to the feature E10, it is possible to achieve excellent effects as already described regarding the light emission control of the light emitting means.

  In addition, the invention of the above-mentioned feature E group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. As these gaming machines, a control device having a CPU or a ROM or having a CPU, a ROM, or the like made into one chip is provided, and the display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device), a light emitting unit (for example, an LED) ), A configuration in which an effect is executed by controlling an effect device such as a speaker is known.

  In the control apparatus, the execution of the effect is controlled by reading data that determines the content of the effect and executing a process corresponding to the read data. Specifically, in the display control of the display device, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed by the control device is read and the display device performs a predetermined display using the read data. A configuration for controlling the display effect is conceivable. In the light emission control of the light emitting unit, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed in the control device is read, and the light emitting unit is caused to emit light in a predetermined pattern using the read data. A configuration to control is conceivable. Also, in the sound output control of the speaker, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed in the control device is read, and a predetermined sound is output from the speaker using the read data, thereby producing the sound output effect. A configuration to control is conceivable.

  Here, it is preferable that there are many types of effects executed by the predetermined effect device, and there is room for improvement in the control method in increasing the types of effects.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Output means (speaker unit 45, light emitting unit groups 71 to 73) capable of executing at least one of production and notification;
Information setting means (in the sound light side MPU 112) for setting control information groups (sound output data, light emission data) used for operating the output means to be usable when performing output control of the output means. A function of executing a process of reading out sound output data, a function of executing a process of reading out light emission data in the sound light side MPU 112),
When the control execution timing is reached, the information corresponding to the control execution timing is used in the control information group to execute the output means (function for executing sound output control processing in the sound light side MPU 112) , A function of executing light emission control processing in the sound light side MPU 112),
With
A plurality of storage areas (first sound output area 171 to sixteenth sound output area 186, base area 162a, interrupt area 162b and notification area 162c) in which the control information group can be set,
When the control information group is stored in a plurality of the storage areas, the execution means operates the output means by using a part of the control information group among the control information groups. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the characteristic F1, in the situation where the output control of the output unit is performed using one control information group, it is necessary to perform the output control of the output unit using another control information group. In addition, the other control information group can be stored separately from the one control information group. Thereby, it is possible to perform various operation | movement according to a condition in one output means. Further, when switching from one operation to the next operation, it is possible to leave a control information group corresponding to the former operation, so that the processing load when returning to the former operation can be reduced. As described above, it is possible to suitably use the output means.

Feature F2. The control information group includes designation information (pointer information) that enables identification of information corresponding to each control execution timing.
The execution means is to operate the output means in a manner corresponding to the control information group by reading out and using information corresponding to the designation information from the control information group,
Among the control information groups stored in the plurality of storage areas, the designation information of the control information group that is not the use target of the execution means is also used for the designation information of the control information group that is the use target. Feature F1 including update means (a function for executing the process of step S1610 in the sound light side MPU 112 and a function of executing the process of step S1814 in the sound light side MPU 112) for updating when the update is performed The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature F2, when the use of the previously used control information group is stopped and the use of another control information group is started, the use of the other control information group is terminated and used earlier. When returning to the state in which the control information group that has been used is restored, at the return timing, the output unit performs the same operation as when the control information group previously used is continuously used. As a result, even if an interrupt use of another control information group occurs, an operation corresponding to the elapsed time can be performed by the output means.

  In particular, in a configuration in which the operation of the output unit is performed in association with another output unit, it is possible to ensure the correspondence with the operation of the other output unit.

Feature F3. In the control information group stored in the plurality of storage areas, a priority in the case where the output unit is used is determined,
The execution means uses the control information group having a high priority when using a part of the control information group when the control information group is stored in a plurality of the storage areas. The gaming machine according to Feature F1 or F2.

  According to the feature F3, in a configuration in which a plurality of control information groups are stored at the same time, a control information group having a high priority is a target of use, and thus the operation of the output unit can be made appropriate. Further, even when a plurality of control information groups are stored at the same time, it is possible to easily select a control information group to be used by comparing priorities. Therefore, the process for selecting the control information group to be used can be simplified.

  Feature F4. The gaming machine according to Feature F3, wherein the plurality of storage areas are provided corresponding to the priorities.

  According to the feature F4, since the priority is set in units of storage areas, it is not necessary to compare priorities for each control information group when selecting a control information group to be used. Therefore, the process for selecting the control information group to be used can be simplified.

Feature F5. The execution means includes
Notification execution means (a function of executing the process of step S1602 in the sound light side MPU 112) that causes the output means to execute notification when the control information group for notification is a use target;
Effect execution means (function to execute the processing of steps S1604 and S1605 in the sound light side MPU 112) that causes the output means to execute an effect when the control information group for effect is the target of use When,
With
The gaming machine according to F3 or F4, wherein the control information group for notification has a higher priority than the control information group for presentation.

  According to the feature F5, the execution of the notification can be given priority over the execution of the effect, and when priority is given to the execution of the notification, it is only necessary to compare the priorities, thereby simplifying the process.

Feature F6. The execution means includes
Base execution means (a function for executing the process of step S1605 in the sound light side MPU 112) that causes the output means to perform a base operation when the control information group for base is a usage target;
An interrupt execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S1604 in the sound light side MPU 112) that causes the output means to perform an interrupt operation when the control information group for interrupt is a usage target;
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F5, wherein the priority of the control information group for interruption is higher than that of the control information group for base.

  According to the feature F6, the interrupt operation can be executed with priority over the base operation, and the design of the operation in the output means can be facilitated. Further, when priority is given to the interrupt operation, it is only necessary to compare the priorities, thereby simplifying the processing.

Feature F7. At least the specific storage area (interrupt area 162b) of the plurality of storage areas is configured such that a new control information group storage instruction can be generated in a situation where the control information group is already stored in the specific storage area. Yes,
The control information group stored in the specific storage area has a storage priority (light emission side priority) for storing in the specific storage area,
When a storage instruction for a new control information group is generated in a situation where the control information group is already stored in the specific storage area, the already stored control information group is more than the new control information group. When the storage priority is high, the storage state of the already stored control information group is maintained without executing the storage process of the new control information group, and the new control information group is more When the storage priority is higher than the control information group that is already stored, the writing means for overwriting the new control information group in the specific storage area (the processing of steps S1412 to S1416 in the sound light side MPU 112 is executed) The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, wherein

  According to the feature F7, when the control information group to be stored in the specific storage area is determined, it is only necessary to compare the storage priorities. Therefore, the process for storing the control information group in the specific storage area can be simplified. Figured.

Feature F8. Provided with a privilege lottery execution means (function to execute the processing of step S301 and step S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player,
The execution means includes
Confirmation execution means for causing the output means to execute an effect for confirming the occurrence of a privilege when the control information group for confirming the occurrence of a privilege is a usage target;
Expectation execution means for causing the output means to execute an effect for expectation of benefit occurrence when the control information group for expectation of benefit occurrence is a use target;
With
The gaming machine according to feature F7, wherein the privilege generation control information group has a higher storage priority than the privilege generation expectation control information group.

  According to the feature F8, priority can be given to the execution of the effect for determining the bonus occurrence. In addition, when priority is given to the execution of the effect for determining the occurrence of the privilege, it is only necessary to compare the storage priorities, so that the process for storing the control information group in the specific storage area can be simplified.

Feature F9. The effect means is a light emitting means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8, wherein the control information group is for determining a light emission pattern of the light emitting means during the predetermined period.

  According to the feature F9, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as already described regarding the light emission control of the light emitting means.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Output means (light emitting unit groups 71 to 73) capable of executing at least one of production and notification;
Information setting means for storing a control information group (light emission data) used for operating the output means in a specific storage area (interrupt area 162b) so that it can be used when performing output control of the output means. (A function of executing a process of reading light emission data in the sound light side MPU 112);
Execution means (sound light side MPU 112) that operates the output means by using information corresponding to the control execution timing in the control information group set in the specific storage area when the control execution timing comes. Function to execute the light emission control process in
With
The control information group stored in the specific storage area has a storage priority (light emission side priority) for storing in the specific storage area,
When a storage instruction for a new control information group is generated in a situation where the control information group is already stored in the specific storage area, the already stored control information group is more than the new control information group. When the storage priority is high, the storage state of the already stored control information group is maintained without executing the storage process of the new control information group, and the new control information group is more When the storage priority is higher than the control information group that is already stored, the writing means for overwriting the new control information group in the specific storage area (the processing of steps S1412 to S1416 in the sound light side MPU 112 is executed) A gaming machine characterized by having a function of

  According to the characteristic G1, when it is necessary to perform output control of the output means using another control information group in a situation where the output control of the output means is performed using one control information group, the other It is possible to switch to output control using the control information group. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform various operation | movement according to a condition in one output means.

  Further, in a configuration in which a new control information group can be overwritten even when a control information group is already stored in the specific storage area, a state in which a control information group having a high storage priority is stored in the specific storage area; Therefore, the operation in the output means can be made appropriate. Furthermore, when determining the control information group to be stored in the specific storage area, it is only necessary to compare the storage priorities. Therefore, the process for storing the control information group in the specific storage area can be simplified. As described above, it is possible to suitably use the output means.

Feature G2. Provided with a privilege lottery execution means (function to execute the processing of step S301 and step S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player,
The execution means includes
Confirmation execution means for causing the output means to execute an effect for confirming the occurrence of a privilege when the control information group for confirming the occurrence of a privilege is a usage target;
Expectation execution means for causing the output means to execute an effect for expectation of benefit occurrence when the control information group for expectation of benefit occurrence is a use target;
With
The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein the privilege generation control information group has a higher storage priority than the privilege generation expectation control information group.

  According to the feature G2, priority can be given to execution of the effect for finalizing the bonus. In addition, when priority is given to the execution of the effect for determining the occurrence of the privilege, it is only necessary to compare the storage priorities, so that the process for storing the control information group in the specific storage area can be simplified.

Feature G3. The effect means is a light emitting means,
The gaming machine according to Feature G1 or G2, wherein the control information group is for determining a light emission pattern of the light emitting means during the predetermined period.

  According to the feature G3, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described regarding the light emission control of the light emitting means.

  The inventions of the feature F group and the feature G group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. As these gaming machines, a control device having a CPU or a ROM or having a CPU, a ROM, or the like made into one chip is provided, and the display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device), a light emitting unit (for example, an LED) ), A configuration in which an effect or notification is executed by controlling an output device such as a speaker is known.

  In the control device, the data that determines the contents of the effects and notifications are read, and the execution of the effects and notifications is controlled by executing processing corresponding to the read data. Specifically, in the display control of the display device, for example, data corresponding to the contents to be executed or notification to be executed by the control device is read, and the display device performs a predetermined display using the read data. Thus, a configuration for controlling the execution of the display effect and the display for notification can be considered. In the light emission control of the light emitting unit, for example, data corresponding to the contents to be executed or notification to be executed in the control device is read, and the light emitting unit is caused to emit light in a predetermined pattern using the read data. A configuration for controlling the execution of the production and the light emission for notification is conceivable. In the sound output control of the speaker, for example, data corresponding to the contents to be executed or notification to be executed in the control device is read, and a predetermined sound is output from the speaker using the read data, so that sound output is performed. A configuration for controlling the execution of the production and the sound output for notification is conceivable.

  Here, there is a demand for a suitable control method with respect to the performance and notification.

<Characteristic H group>
Feature H1. A plurality of driving means (curtain plate drive units 56a and 56b) used to drive the movable effect means (curtain plate movable object 52);
A plurality of position detection means (adjustment position sensors 58a, 58b) provided to correspond to each drive means and used to detect that the drive target of each drive means is disposed at a corresponding predetermined position;
In each of these position detection means, a predetermined operation (third) corresponding to each drive object is detected on at least one condition that it is detected that the drive object of each drive means is arranged at the corresponding predetermined position. Drive control means for controlling the drive means so as to perform a step operation or a return operation (function for executing the processes of steps S2003, S2005, S2007, S2009 and S2010 in the sound light side MPU 112);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H1, the timing at which the predetermined operation is performed on each drive target is not specified by measuring time, but the predetermined operation is performed after it is detected that each drive target is arranged at the predetermined position. Therefore, it is possible to synchronize the operation of each drive target when executing a predetermined operation. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform the execution control of the effect using the movable object.

Feature H2. The drive control means includes
First drive control means (function to execute the process of step S2005 in the sound light side MPU 112) for driving and controlling each drive means so that a specific operation corresponding to each of the drive objects is performed;
After the specific operation corresponding to each driving target is performed, at least one of the plurality of position detecting means detects that the driving target is disposed at the corresponding predetermined position. As a condition, a second drive control means (function to execute the processes of steps S2009 and S2010 in the sound light side MPU 112) for driving and controlling each drive means so as to perform the predetermined operation corresponding to each drive object, and
The gaming machine according to Feature H1, comprising:

  According to the feature H2, when a predetermined operation is performed after a specific operation is performed on each drive target, it is possible to synchronize the start timing of the predetermined operation.

  Feature H3. The drive control means performs drive control of the drive means so that the drive objects are arranged at the predetermined positions corresponding to the drive objects after the specific operation corresponding to the drive objects is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature H2, further comprising means (a function of executing the process of Step S2007 in the sound light side MPU 112).

  According to the feature H3, even after the specific operation, after each driving object is arranged at a predetermined position, the predetermined operation can be started in synchronization with each driving object.

Feature H4. Each of the driving objects is configured to operate by shifting from the initial position to the effect position when executing the effect,
The gaming machine according to Feature H3, wherein the predetermined position is present on an initial position side than a position when the specific operation is performed.

  According to the feature H4, in order to start the predetermined operation in synchronization with each driving object, the predetermined operation is started after the driving object is arranged at the predetermined position. It is possible to make the player recognize that the action is a return action to the initial position. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize the operation for placing it at the predetermined position without a sense of incongruity, and to provide the player with unexpectedness when the predetermined operation is performed.

  Feature H5. The drive control means is a return control means for drivingly controlling the drive means so that the drive means are arranged at corresponding initial positions after the drive objects are arranged at the corresponding predetermined positions. The gaming machine according to Feature H3 or H4, further comprising a function of executing the processing of Step S2010 in the sound light side MPU 112).

  According to the feature H5, even when returning to the initial position without performing the predetermined operation after the specific operation, the return to the initial position is started after each drive object is arranged at the predetermined position. The return operation to the position can be synchronized in each drive target. Further, the player pays attention to whether the return operation to the initial position is performed after being arranged at the predetermined position or whether the predetermined operation occurs, and the player's attention to the movable effect means is increased. It becomes possible.

Feature H6. Each of the driving objects is configured to operate by shifting from the initial position to the effect position when executing the effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the predetermined position is located on the side of the effect position with respect to the initial position.

  According to the feature H6, it is not necessary to return to the initial position when each drive target is arranged at a predetermined position so as to start the predetermined operation in synchronization. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the displacement amount for arranging at a predetermined position.

  Feature H7. In each of the position detection means, an effect according to the predetermined action is produced by the effect execution means (design) on the condition that at least one condition is detected that the drive target of each drive means is arranged at the corresponding predetermined position. Display control means (function to execute light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound light side MPU 112, display side MPU 122) to be performed in the display device 31, speaker unit 45, various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73) The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, comprising:

  According to the feature H7, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the effect in the effect means in synchronization with the start of the predetermined operation.

Feature H8. It is a configuration in which an effect by the movable effect means can be performed in the middle of the first effect range,
The production control means includes
Means for controlling the effect execution means (function to execute task processing in the display side MPU 122) so that the contents of the effect change with the passage of time in the first effect range;
In the first effect range, an effect corresponding to the predetermined operation is obtained after it is detected that each of the position detection means detects that the driving target of each driving means is arranged at the corresponding predetermined position. Means for controlling the effect execution means to be performed (a function of performing an affirmative determination in step S3401 in the display side MPU 122 and executing the process of step S3402);
The gaming machine according to Feature H7, comprising:

  According to the feature H8, it is easy to synchronize the action corresponding to the predetermined action with the operation of the movable effect means while performing the effect execution control in the effect executing means according to the elapsed time.

  Feature H9. The production control means is for standby until at least one of the position detection means in the first production range detects that the driving target of each driving means is disposed at the corresponding predetermined position. The feature H8 is characterized by comprising means for controlling the effect execution means so that the effect is performed (a function of performing a negative determination in step S3401 on the display side MPU 122 and executing the process of step S3403). The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature H9, since the stand-by effect is performed by the effect executing unit even during the period when the predetermined operation is started in the movable effect unit, the player feels uncomfortable about the effect in the effect executing unit. It becomes difficult.

Feature H10. First production execution control means (sound light side MPU 112) having the drive control means;
Second effect execution control means (display-side MPU 122) having the effect control means;
With
The first effect execution control means starts drive control of each of the drive means when transmitting transmission information corresponding to the fact that the second effect execution control means should start drive control,
The production control means corresponds to the first control means based on at least one condition that each of the position detection means detects that the drive target of each drive means is arranged at the corresponding predetermined position. The gaming machine according to any one of features H7 to H9, wherein when the transmitted information is transmitted, the effect executing means is controlled so that an effect corresponding to the predetermined operation is performed.

  According to the feature H10, when a predetermined operation is performed in the movable effect means while the effect can be executed in the movable effect means in accordance with the progress of the effect in the effect execution means, the effect in the effect execution means is synchronized with it. It becomes possible to make it.

Feature H11. The effect execution means is a display means having a display unit,
The game according to any one of features H7 to H10, wherein the movable effect means includes an operation range including a range facing the display unit from a direction in which the display unit faces. Machine.

  According to the feature H11, in the configuration in which the predetermined operation is performed by the movable effect unit in association with the display effect in the display unit, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

  Feature H12. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H11, wherein the movable effect means is a movable object that operates integrally, and each of the driving objects is connected to the movable object.

  According to the feature H12, in the movable object which operates integrally, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

  Note that the invention of the above-described feature group H can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a movable object that is driven and operated by a driving device such as a solenoid or a rotary motor are known.

  For example, as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the entrance part provided in the game area, and the display of the display device displays a variation of the pattern. In such a case, a configuration is known in which a combination of specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is entered. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device. In this case, for example, when the movable object is operated in a situation where the display of the variation of the pattern is performed, the transition to the special gaming state occurs with a relatively high probability thereafter. I try to enhance the fun of the game.

  Here, there is a demand for a configuration that can suitably perform execution control using a movable object, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. First effect execution control means (sound light side MPU 112) for controlling first effect execution means (curtain plate movable object 52);
Second effect execution control means (display-side MPU 122) for controlling second effect execution means (symbol display device 31);
With
The first effect execution control means is a correspondence information setting means (sound) that sets information corresponding to the effect content of the first effect execution means when the effect content becomes the predetermined effect content or when it becomes the predetermined effect content. A function of executing the process of step S3309 in the optical side MPU 112),
The second effect execution control means is such that when the corresponding information is set by the correspondence information setting means, the effect content of the second effect execution means becomes a specific effect content. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature I1, when the production content of the first production execution unit becomes the predetermined production content or when the production content becomes the predetermined production content, the information corresponding to the setting is set, and the second production execution unit is corresponding thereto. The content of the production is the specific content of the production. Thereby, it becomes easy to synchronize the predetermined effect content in the first effect execution means and the specific effect content in the second effect execution means. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform an effect using a plurality of types of effect executing means.

Feature I2. In the middle of the first production range, the production content of the first production execution means can be a predetermined production content,
The second effect execution control means includes:
Means for controlling the second effect execution means (function for executing task processing in the display-side MPU 122) so that the contents of the effect change with time in the first effect range;
In the first effect range, after the corresponding information is set by the correspondence information setting unit, a unit (step in the display-side MPU 122) that controls the second effect execution unit so that the specific effect content is obtained. A function of making an affirmative determination in S3401 and executing the process of step S3402);
The gaming machine according to Feature I1, further comprising:

  According to the feature I2, while the execution control of the effect in the second effect executing means is basically performed according to the elapsed time, the predetermined effect content in the first effect executing means and the specific effect in the second effect executing means. It becomes easy to synchronize the contents.

  Feature I3. The second effect execution control means controls the second effect execution means so that a standby effect is performed at least until the corresponding information is set by the corresponding information setting means in the first effect range. The gaming machine according to Feature I2, further comprising means for controlling (a function of performing a negative determination in Step S3401 in Step S3401 in the display-side MPU 122).

  According to the feature I3, since the standby effect is performed by the second effect execution unit even during a period of waiting until the information is set by the correspondence information setting unit, Become difficult to embarrass.

Feature I4. The first effect execution control means responds to the transmission information when the second effect execution control means transmits transmission information corresponding to the fact that execution control of the effect of the first effect execution means should be started. The execution control of the effect in the first effect execution means is started so that the effect according to the aspect is performed,
The second effect execution control means transmits the corresponding transmission information when the effect content of the first effect execution means becomes a predetermined effect content or when it becomes a predetermined effect content. In this case, the gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics I1 to I3, wherein the content of the performance of the second performance executing means is a specific content of the performance.

  According to the characteristic I4, while the execution of the effect in the first effect execution means can be executed in accordance with the progress of the effect in the second effect execution means, the predetermined effect content in the first effect execution means and the second effect execution means It becomes easy to synchronize with the specific production content.

Feature I5. The first effect executing means is a movable effect means,
The correspondence information setting means sets the corresponding information when the position detection means (adjustment position sensors 58a, 58b) detects that the movable effect means has reached a predetermined position. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4.

  According to the characteristic I5, when the position detecting unit detects that the movable effect unit has reached the predetermined position, the effect content of the second effect executing unit is set as the specific effect content. Even if a deviation occurs, it is possible to make the production content of the second production execution means a specific production content in synchronization with a predetermined operation being performed in the movable production means.

  Feature I6. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, wherein the first effect executing means and the second effect executing means are different types of effect executing means.

  According to the feature I6, in the configuration in which the first effect executing unit and the second effect executing unit are different types of effect executing units, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature I7. The second effect execution means is display means having a display unit,
Any one of the characteristics I1 to I6 is characterized in that the first effect executing means is a movable effect means whose operation range includes a range facing the display unit from a direction facing the display unit. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature I7, in the configuration in which the predetermined operation is performed by the movable effect unit in association with the display effect in the display unit, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

  Note that the invention of the above-described feature group I can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. As these gaming machines, a configuration in which a presentation is performed using a plurality of types of presentation devices is known.

  For example, a configuration in which a presentation is performed using at least a display device such as a liquid crystal display device and a speaker is known. In this case, a sound corresponding to display content on the display device is output from the speaker. Further, for example, a configuration is known in which an effect is produced using at least a light emitting unit such as an LED and a speaker. In this case, the light emitting unit is controlled with a lighting pattern corresponding to the content of sound output from the speaker. . In addition, for example, a configuration in which an effect is produced using at least the display device and the movable object is known. In this case, the operation of the movable object is started according to the display content on the display device.

  There is a demand for a configuration that can perform control satisfactorily in a configuration that uses a plurality of types of rendering devices as in the above-described examples.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Production execution means (disk movable objects 62a and 62b) that operate so as to be in a predetermined operation state at least once for one execution of operation times
Start control means for executing the start control of the effect execution means so as to start the operation (function for executing the processes of steps S2603, S2704, and S2705 in the sound light side MPU 112);
Stop information setting means (function for executing the process of step S1212 in the sound light side MPU 112) for setting stop information (stop command flag) in a situation where the effect execution means is operating,
When the stop information is set, stop control means for stopping the operation of the effect execution means after the effect execution means enters the predetermined operation state (step S2615 in the sound light side MPU 112 in the first embodiment). , A function of executing the processing of step S3005 and step S3010, a function of executing the processing of step S3208, step S3217, and step S3220 in the sound light side MPU 112 in the second embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J1, since the effect execution unit is stopped after reaching a predetermined operation state, it is possible to unify the mode when the effect execution unit is stopped. In addition, the control mode when operating the effect execution means is standardized into each mode of start control, stop information setting control, and stop control when a predetermined operation state is reached after stop information setting control. Therefore, the process can be simplified when diversifying the operation period of the effect execution means. As described above, it is possible to suitably perform the execution control.

Feature J2. As the timing at which the stop information is set by the stop information setting means, there are a plurality of types of timings such that the elapsed time after the start control is executed by the start control means is different,
The multiple types of timing include the timing at which the stop information is set when the operation times of the effect execution means are the specific number of times, and the stop information when the number of times is different from the specific number of times. The gaming machine according to feature J1, characterized in that a set timing is included.

  According to the feature J2, it is possible to diversify the number of operations of the effect executing means while enabling the operation to be stopped after the predetermined operation state is achieved only by adjusting the setting timing of the stop information.

Feature J3. The effect execution means is a movable effect means capable of simultaneously executing a first action (rotation action) and a second action (slide action) different from the first action,
The operation in which the operation times occur is configured as the first operation,
Depending on the set timing of the stop information, there may be a case where the first operation is stopped before the second operation and a case where the first operation is stopped after the second operation. The gaming machine according to Feature J1 or J2, wherein the gaming machine is a configuration.

  According to the feature J3, it is possible to diversify the operation mode of the effect execution means only by adjusting the setting timing of the stop information.

  Feature J4. The stop information setting means sets the stop information according to the progress of the effect in another effect execution means (symbol display device 31) different from the effect execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of J3.

  According to the feature J4, it is possible to perform an effect in the effect executing means so as to be in correlation with the progress of the effect in another effect means, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the effect. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature J1, even if the operation in the effect execution unit is stopped in accordance with the progress of the effect in the other effect execution unit, the effect execution unit performs the predetermined operation. Since the operation is stopped after the state is reached, it is possible to unify the mode when the production execution means is stopped.

Feature J5. The effect execution means is a movable effect means,
The predetermined operation state is an operation state in which the movable effect unit is detected by a predetermined detection unit (initial rotation position sensors 69a and 69b), according to any one of features J1 to J4, Game machines.

  According to the feature J5, since the operation of the movable effect means is stopped after it is detected by the predetermined detection means, it is possible to unify the appearance of the movable effect means when not operating, and the movable effect means. It is also possible to unify the mode at the start of operation of the means.

Feature J6. The stop control means includes
An operation position grasping means for grasping an operation position of the movable effecting means (a function for executing the processes of Step S2708, Step S2709, Step S2713, Step S2714, Step S2906 and Step S2907 in the sound light side MPU 112);
When the stop information is set and the grasping result of the movement position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, even if the movable effecting means is detected by the predetermined detecting means, the operation of the movable effecting means is performed. Limiting means (a function for executing the process of step S2802 in the sound light side MPU 112) to set a limit state that is not stopped,
A gaming machine according to Feature J5, comprising:

  According to the feature J6, when stop information is set when the grasping result of the movement position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, even if the movable effecting means is detected by the predetermined detecting means, the movable effecting means Will not be stopped. As a result, if it is inconvenient to stop the movable effect means, it is possible to avoid the stop of the movable effect means, and it is possible to stop the movable effect means at a preferred timing.

Feature J7. Stepping motors for driving the movable effect means (disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b),
The game machine according to Feature J6, wherein the movement position grasping means grasps the movement position of the movable effecting means using the number of steps of the stepping motor.

  According to the feature J7, the processing configuration for grasping the operating position of the movable effect means can be simplified.

  Feature J8. The predetermined grasp result about the movement position grasping means exists in a limited range in which the movement position of the movable effect means is a partial range of all the movement positions and is detected by the predetermined detection means. The gaming machine according to Feature J6 or J7, wherein the gaming machine is a grasping result corresponding to what is being performed.

  When the stop information is set in a situation where the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means, or when the move effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means immediately after the stop information is set, the movable effect means is selected. If it is attempted to stop, the stop mode of the movable effect means may become undesirable. On the other hand, according to the feature J8, when the stop information is set in such a situation, the stop of the movable effect means is restricted, so that the stop mode of the movable effect means is suitable. It becomes possible to do.

  Feature J9. The stop control means is detected by the predetermined detection means after the movable effect means exceeds the limit range when the stop information is set when the stop state is entered. The game machine according to Feature J8, further comprising: a restriction release unit (a function of executing the process of step S2910 in the sound light side MPU 112) for releasing the restriction state by the time.

  According to the feature J9, even if it is restricted that the movable effect means is stopped, it is within the range of one operation, so that the operation period of the movable effect means does not become longer than necessary. However, it is possible to achieve excellent effects as already described.

Feature J10. Stepping motors for driving the movable effect means (disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b),
The operation position grasping means grasps the operation position of the movable effecting means using the number of steps of the stepping motor,
The restriction release means is configured to perform the restriction when the number of steps grasped by the movement position grasping means becomes a restriction release step number (step number for stop release determination) after exceeding the restriction range. The gaming machine according to Feature J9, wherein the gaming machine is for releasing the state.

  According to the feature J10, simplification of the processing configuration for grasping the operation position of the movable rendering means and the processing configuration for releasing the restriction on the stop of the movable rendering means is achieved.

Feature J11. The stop control means includes
A detection result confirmation means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3102 and S3104 in the sound light side MPU 112) for executing detection result confirmation processing for confirming the detection result of the predetermined detection means;
History storage execution means (sound light side MPU 112) for storing the confirmation result of the detection result confirmation means in the history storage means (the areas 164a to 164f of the movable object data area 164) at least until the next detection result confirmation process. In step S3101 and step S3103 in FIG.
When the history information stored in the history storage means is information corresponding to the stop position of the movable effect means, stop means for stopping the movable effect means (step S3208 in the sound side MPU 112, step S3208) The function of executing the processing of S3217 and step S3220),
A gaming machine according to any one of J5 to J10, comprising:

  According to the feature J11, the stop control of the movable effecting means is executed according to the content of the history information stored in the history storage means at the timing when the stop information is set. It is possible to execute stop control of the movable effect means without waiting for the execution of the confirmation process for the detection result of the detection means.

Feature J12. The stop control means includes stop information confirmation means (function for executing the process of step S3202 in the sound light side MPU 112) for executing stop information confirmation processing for confirming whether or not the stop information is set,
The gaming machine according to Feature J11, wherein the detection result confirmation means executes the detection result confirmation process at least once before the stop information confirmation process is executed once.

  According to the feature J12, it is difficult for a time lag to occur between the history information of the history storage unit at the timing when the stop information confirmation process is executed and the detection result of the predetermined detection unit at that time. In the configuration in which the movable effect means is stopped with reference, it becomes easy to perform stop control in accordance with the operation position of the movable effect means.

Feature J13. The history storage means includes a plurality of storage areas that can store the confirmation results of the detection result confirmation means,
The stop means is stored in the history storage means when a plurality of predetermined detection results corresponding to the detection of the movable effect means in the predetermined detection means are continuously stored in a plurality of the storage areas. It is determined that the stored history information is information corresponding to a stop position of the movable effect means, and the movable effect means is stopped. .

  According to the feature J13, even when an abnormality such as noise occurs in the detection result of the predetermined detection unit, it is possible to accurately perform the stop control of the movable effect unit.

Feature J14. The movable effect means includes first movable effect means (left disk movable object 62a) and second movable effect means (right disk movable object 62b),
The predetermined detection means is provided so as to be able to detect that the first movable effect means has reached a predetermined initial position, and to detect that the second movable effect means has reached a predetermined initial position,
When the stop information is set, the stop control means causes at least the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means to be stopped synchronously at corresponding predetermined initial positions. Synchronization stopping means (a function for executing the process of step S2718 in the sound light side MPU 112 in the first embodiment, a function for executing a sensor monitoring process in the sound light side MPU 112 in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features J5 to J13.

  According to the feature J14, in a configuration including a plurality of movable effect means, the movable effect means can be stopped in synchronization with each other, and the operations of the plurality of movable effect means can be interphased.

Feature J15. The means for stopping synchronization is
First operation position grasping means (function for executing the processing of steps S2708, S2713 and S2906 in the sound light side MPU 112) for grasping the operation position of the first movable effect means;
Second movement position grasping means for grasping the movement position of the second movable effect means (function for executing the processes of steps S2709, S2714 and S2907 in the sound light side MPU 112);
When the stop information is set, at least when the grasping result of the first action position grasping means or the second action position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, or at least the first action position grasping means and the first 2. When both grasping results of the two movement position grasping means are predetermined grasping results, even if the first movable effecting means is detected by the predetermined detecting means, the operation of the first movable effecting means is not stopped Even if the second movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means, the restricting means (in step S2802 in the sound light side MPU 112) that sets the restricted state in which the operation of the second movable effect means is not stopped. Processing function), and
A gaming machine according to Feature J14, comprising:

  According to feature J15, when the grasping result of any one of the motion position grasping means or each of the motion position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, each movable effect means by the predetermined detecting means in a situation where stop information is set. Even if this is detected, each movable effect means is not stopped. Thus, if the stop control of each movable effect means is executed, it is possible to avoid the stop of each movable effect means in a situation where each movable effect means cannot be stopped in synchronization. Thus, it becomes easy to stop each movable effect means in a synchronized state.

Feature J16. A first stepping motor (disk rotation driving unit 67a) for driving the first movable effect means; and a second stepping motor (disk rotation driving unit 67b) for driving the second movable effect means;
The first movement position grasping means grasps the movement position of the first movable effect means using the number of steps of the first stepping motor,
The game machine according to Feature J15, wherein the second movement position grasping means grasps the movement position of the second movable effect means using the number of steps of the second stepping motor.

  According to the feature J16, the processing configuration for grasping the operation position of each movable effect means can be simplified.

Feature J17. The predetermined grasp result for the first movement position grasping means includes a range in which the movement position of the first movable effect means is a part of the entire movement position and is detected by the predetermined detection means. It is a grasp result corresponding to being in the first limit range,
The predetermined grasp result for the second movement position grasping means includes a range in which the movement position of the second movable effect means is a part of the entire movement position and is detected by the predetermined detection means. The gaming machine according to Feature J15 or J16, which is a grasping result corresponding to being in the second restriction range.

  When the stop information is set in a situation where the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means, or when the move effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means immediately after the stop information is set, each movable effect means is set. If it tries to stop, the stop mode in the state where each movable effect means was synchronized may become unpreferable. On the other hand, according to the feature J17, when the stop information is set in such a situation, the stop of each movable effect means is limited, and thus it is easy to stop each movable effect means in a synchronized state. Become.

  Feature J18. When the synchronization stop means is in the restricted state, at least both of the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means exceed the limit range when the stop information is set. And a restriction releasing means (a function for executing the processing of step S2910 in the sound light side MPU 112) for releasing the restriction state until the next detection by the predetermined detecting means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature J18, even if each movable effect means is restricted from being stopped, it is within the range of one operation, so the operation period of each movable effect means does not become longer than necessary. In this way, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

Feature J19. A first stepping motor (disk rotation driving unit 67a) for driving the first movable effect means; and a second stepping motor (disk rotation driving unit 67b) for driving the second movable effect means;
The first movement position grasping means grasps the movement position of the first movable effect means using the number of steps of the first stepping motor,
The second movement position grasping means grasps the movement position of the second movable effect means using the number of steps of the second stepping motor,
The restriction release means is when the number of steps grasped by at least the first movement position grasping means and the second movement position grasping means becomes the number of restriction release steps after exceeding the restriction range. The gaming machine according to Feature J18, wherein the gaming machine releases the restricted state.

  According to the feature J19, simplification of the processing configuration for grasping the operation position of each movable effect means and the processing configuration for releasing the restriction on the stop of each movable effect means can be achieved.

Feature J20. The means for stopping synchronization is
First detection result confirmation means (function for executing the process of step S3102 in the sound light side MPU 112) for executing a first detection result confirmation process for confirming a detection result of the predetermined detection means for the first movable effect means;
Second detection result confirmation means (function for executing the process of step S3104 in the sound light side MPU 112) for executing a second detection result confirmation process for confirming the detection result of the predetermined detection means for the second movable effect means;
First history storage execution in which the confirmation result of the first detection result confirmation means is stored in the first history storage means (the areas 164a to 164c of the movable object data area 164) at least until the next processing time of the first confirmation processing. Means (function for executing the processing of step S3101 in the sound light side MPU 112);
Second history storage execution for storing the confirmation result of the second detection result confirmation means in the second history storage means (the areas 164d to 164f of the movable object data area 164) at least until the next processing time of the second confirmation processing. Means (function for executing the process of step S3103 in the sound light side MPU 112);
Stop means for performing stop control of each movable effect means in accordance with the contents of the history information stored in each history storage means (function for executing the processes of steps S3208, S3217 and S3220 in the sound light side MPU 112) When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J14 to J19, comprising:

  According to the feature J20, the stop control of each movable effect means is executed according to the content of the history information stored in each history storage means at the timing when the stop information is set. It is possible to execute stop control of each movable effect means without waiting for execution of the confirmation process for the detection result of the predetermined detection means. Thereby, it becomes easy to stop each movable effect means in a synchronized state.

  Feature J21. The stop means is information in which both history information stored in the first history storage means and history information stored in the second history storage means correspond to a stop position of the corresponding movable effect means. If it is, the gaming machine according to the feature J20, wherein both the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means are stopped.

  According to the feature J21, in a state where both the movable effect means are detected by the predetermined detection means, it is possible to stop these movable effect means in a synchronized state.

  In addition, the invention of the above-mentioned feature J group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. As these gaming machines, a configuration in which an effect is performed using an effect device is known.

  For example, a configuration in which a display effect is performed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. Further, for example, a configuration is known in which light is produced by a predetermined light emission pattern in a light emitting unit such as an LED. In addition, for example, a configuration in which a presentation is performed by performing a predetermined operation using a movable object is known.

  Here, there is a demand for a configuration that can suitably perform the execution control of the effect, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Movable presentation means (disc movable objects 62a, 62b) that operate so as to be detected at least once by predetermined detection means (rotation initial position sensors 69a, 69b) for one execution of the operation times;
Start control means for executing start control of the movable effect means so as to start the operation (function for executing the processes of steps S2704 and S2705 in the sound light side MPU 112);
Stop information setting means (function for executing the process of step S1212 in the sound light side MPU 112) for setting stop information (stop command flag) in a situation where the movable effect means is operating;
When the stop information is set, stop control means (steps S3208, S3217 and S3220 in the sound light side MPU 112) for stopping the operation of the movable effect means after the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means. Function to execute processing)
With
The stop control means is
A detection result confirmation means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3102 and S3104 in the sound light side MPU 112) for executing detection result confirmation processing for confirming the detection result of the predetermined detection means;
History storage execution means (step in the sound side MPU 112) for storing the confirmation result of the detection result confirmation means in the history storage means (the areas 164a to 164f of the movable object data area 164) at least until the next processing of the confirmation processing. The function of executing the processing of S3101 and step S3103),
When the history information stored in the history storage means is information corresponding to the stop position of the movable effect means, stop means for stopping the movable effect means (step S3208 in the sound side MPU 112, step S3208) The function of executing the processing of S3217 and step S3220),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature K1, since the operation of the movable effect unit is stopped after the state is detected by the predetermined detection unit, it is possible to unify the appearance of the movable effect unit during non-operation and It is also possible to unify the mode at the start of operation of the means. In addition, the control mode when operating the movable effect unit is standardized into each mode of start control, stop information setting control, and stop control when detected by a predetermined detection unit after stop information setting control. Therefore, the process can be simplified when diversifying the operation period of the movable effect means. Furthermore, since the stop control of the movable effect means is executed according to the content of the history information stored in the history storage means at the timing when the stop information is set, when the stop information is set, the predetermined detection means It is possible to execute the stop control of the movable effect means without waiting for the execution of the confirmation process for the detection result. From the above, it is possible to suitably perform the execution control using the movable effect means.

Feature K2. The stop control means includes stop information confirmation means (function for executing the process of step S3202 in the sound light side MPU 112) for executing stop information confirmation processing for confirming whether or not the stop information is set,
The gaming machine according to claim K1, wherein the detection result confirmation unit executes the detection result confirmation process at least once before the stop information confirmation process is executed once.

  According to the feature K2, it is difficult for a time lag to occur between the history information of the history storage unit at the timing when the stop information confirmation process is executed and the detection result of the predetermined detection unit at that time. In the configuration in which the movable effect means is stopped with reference, it becomes easy to perform stop control in accordance with the operation position of the movable effect means.

Feature K3. The history storage means includes a plurality of storage areas that can store the confirmation results of the detection result confirmation means,
The stop means is stored in the history storage means when a plurality of predetermined detection results corresponding to the detection of the movable effect means in the predetermined detection means are continuously stored in a plurality of the storage areas. It is determined that the stored history information is information corresponding to the stop position of the movable effect means, and the movable effect means is stopped. The gaming machine according to the feature K1 or K2 .

  According to the feature K3, even when an abnormality such as noise occurs in the detection result of the predetermined detection unit, it is possible to accurately perform stop control of the movable effect unit.

Feature K4. The movable effect means includes first movable effect means (left disk movable object 62a) and second movable effect means (right disk movable object 62b),
The predetermined detection means is provided so as to be able to detect that the first movable effect means has reached a predetermined initial position, and to detect that the second movable effect means has reached a predetermined initial position,
The detection result confirmation means includes
First detection result confirmation means (function for executing the process of step S3102 in the sound light side MPU 112) for executing a first detection result confirmation process for confirming a detection result of the predetermined detection means for the first movable effect means;
Second detection result confirmation means (function for executing the process of step S3104 in the sound light side MPU 112) for executing a second detection result confirmation process for confirming the detection result of the predetermined detection means for the second movable effect means;
With
The history storage executing means includes
First history storage execution in which the confirmation result of the first detection result confirmation means is stored in the first history storage means (the areas 164a to 164c of the movable object data area 164) at least until the next processing time of the first confirmation processing. Means (function for executing the processing of step S3101 in the sound light side MPU 112);
Second history storage execution for storing the confirmation result of the second detection result confirmation means in the second history storage means (the areas 164d to 164f of the movable object data area 164) at least until the next processing time of the second confirmation processing. Means (function for executing the process of step S3103 in the sound light side MPU 112);
With
The stop means performs stop control of each movable effect means according to the contents of history information stored in each history storage means, according to any one of the features K1 to K3, Game machines.

  According to the feature K4, the stop control of each movable effect means is executed according to the content of the history information stored in each history storage means at the timing when the stop information is set. It is possible to execute stop control of each movable effect means without waiting for execution of the confirmation process for the detection result of the predetermined detection means. Thereby, it becomes easy to stop each movable effect means in a synchronized state.

  Feature K5. The stop means is information in which both history information stored in the first history storage means and history information stored in the second history storage means correspond to a stop position of the corresponding movable effect means. If it is, the game machine according to the feature K4, wherein both the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means are stopped.

  According to the characteristic K5, in a state where both the movable effect means are detected by the predetermined detection means, it is possible to stop the respective movable effect means in a synchronized state.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. Movable presentation means (disc movable objects 62a, 62b) that operate so as to be detected at least once by predetermined detection means (rotation initial position sensors 69a, 69b) for one execution of the operation times;
Start control means for executing start control of the movable effect means so as to start the operation (function for executing the processes of steps S2603, S2704, and S2705 in the sound light side MPU 112);
Stop information setting means (function for executing the process of step S1212 in the sound light side MPU 112) for setting stop information (stop command flag) in a situation where the movable effect means is operating;
When the stop information is set, stop control means (steps S2615, S3005, and S3010 in the sound light side MPU 112) that stops the operation of the movable effect means after the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means. Function to execute processing)
With
The stop control means is
An operation position grasping means for grasping an operation position of the movable effecting means (a function for executing the processes of Step S2708, Step S2709, Step S2713, Step S2714, Step S2906 and Step S2907 in the sound light side MPU 112);
When the stop information is set and the grasping result of the movement position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, even if the movable effecting means is detected by the predetermined detecting means, the operation of the movable effecting means is performed. Limiting means (a function for executing the process of step S2802 in the sound light side MPU 112) to set a limit state that is not stopped,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature L1, since the operation of the movable effect unit is stopped after the state is detected by the predetermined detection unit, it is possible to unify the appearance of the movable effect unit when not operating, and the movable effect unit. It is also possible to unify the mode at the start of operation of the means. In this case, if the grasping result of the operation position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, even if the movable effecting means is detected by the predetermined detecting means in a situation where stop information is set, the movable effecting means Not stopped. As a result, if it is inconvenient to stop the movable effect means, it is possible to avoid the stop of the movable effect means, and it is possible to stop the movable effect means at a preferred timing. From the above, it is possible to suitably perform the execution control using the movable effect means.

Feature L2. Stepping motors for driving the movable effect means (disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b),
The game machine according to Feature L1, wherein the movement position grasping means grasps the movement position of the movable effecting means using the number of steps of the stepping motor.

  According to the feature L2, the processing configuration for grasping the operation position of the movable effect means can be simplified.

  Feature L3. The predetermined grasp result about the movement position grasping means exists in a limited range in which the movement position of the movable effect means is a partial range of all the movement positions and is detected by the predetermined detection means. The gaming machine according to the feature L1 or L1, wherein the gaming machine is a grasping result corresponding to what is being performed.

  When the stop information is set in a situation where the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means, or when the move effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means immediately after the stop information is set, the movable effect means is selected. If it is attempted to stop, the stop mode of the movable effect means may become undesirable. On the other hand, according to the feature L3, when the stop information is set in such a situation, the stop of the movable effect means is restricted, so that the stop mode of the movable effect means is suitable. It becomes possible to do.

  Feature L4. The stop control means is detected by the predetermined detection means after the movable effect means exceeds the limit range when the stop information is set when the stop state is entered. The game machine according to Feature L3, further comprising: a restriction release unit (a function of executing the process of step S2910 in the sound light side MPU 112) for releasing the restriction state by the time.

  According to the feature L4, even if it is restricted that the movable effect means is stopped, it is within the range of one operation, so that the operation period of the movable effect means is not prolonged longer than necessary. However, it is possible to achieve excellent effects as already described.

Feature L5. Stepping motors for driving the movable effect means (disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b),
The operation position grasping means grasps the operation position of the movable effecting means using the number of steps of the stepping motor,
The restriction release means is to release the restriction state when the number of steps grasped by the operation position grasping means becomes a restriction release step number after exceeding the restriction range. The gaming machine according to Feature L4, which is characterized.

  According to the feature L5, simplification of the processing configuration for grasping the operation position of the movable rendering means and the processing configuration for releasing the restriction on the stop of the movable rendering means is achieved.

Feature L6. First movable effect means (left disk movable object 62a) capable of performing a movable effect;
Second movable effect means (right disk movable object 62b) capable of performing a movable effect;
Start control means for executing start control of the first movable effect means so as to start operation, and start control means for executing start control of the second movable effect means so as to start operation (steps S2704 and steps in the sound light side MPU 112) The function of executing the processing of S2705),
Stop information setting means (function to execute the process of step S1212 in the sound light side MPU 112) for setting stop information (stop command flag) in a situation where each movable effect means is operating,
After the stop information is set, stop control means (function to execute the processing of steps S3005 and S3010 in the sound light side MPU 112) for stopping the operations of the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means,
With
The stop control means is
First operation position grasping means (function for executing the processing of steps S2708, S2713 and S2906 in the sound light side MPU 112) for grasping the operation position of the first movable effect means;
Second movement position grasping means for grasping the movement position of the second movable effect means (function for executing the processes of steps S2709, S2714 and S2907 in the sound light side MPU 112);
When the stop information is set, at least when the grasping result of the first action position grasping means or the second action position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, or at least the first action position grasping means and the first Restriction that both the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means are stopped after being displaced by a predetermined amount when both grasped results of the two motion position grasping means are predetermined grasp results. Means (function for executing the processing of step S2802 in the sound light side MPU 112);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature L6, in a configuration including a plurality of movable effect means, the movable effect means can be stopped in synchronization, and the operations of the plurality of movable effect means can be interphased. Further, when the grasping result of any one of the motion position grasping means or each of the motion position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, each movable effect means is displaced by a predetermined amount even in the situation where stop information is set. It is stopped after being done. Thus, if the stop control of each movable effect means is executed, it is possible to avoid the stop of each movable effect means in a situation where each movable effect means cannot be stopped in synchronization. Thus, it becomes easy to stop each movable effect means in a synchronized state. From the above, it is possible to suitably perform the execution control using the movable effect means.

Feature L7. A first stepping motor (disk rotation driving unit 67a) for driving the first movable effect means; and a second stepping motor (disk rotation driving unit 67b) for driving the second movable effect means;
The first movement position grasping means grasps the movement position of the first movable effect means using the number of steps of the first stepping motor,
The game machine according to Feature L6, wherein the second movement position grasping means grasps the movement position of the second movable effect means using the number of steps of the second stepping motor.

  According to the feature L7, the processing configuration for grasping the operation position of each movable effect means can be simplified.

Feature L8. The predetermined grasp result of the first movement position grasping means includes a range in which the movement position of the first movable effect means is a partial range of all the movement positions and detected by the predetermined detection means. It is a grasping result corresponding to being in one limit range,
The predetermined grasp result for the second movement position grasping means includes a range in which the movement position of the second movable effect means is a partial range of all the movement positions and is detected by the predetermined detection means. 2. The gaming machine according to Feature L6 or L7, wherein the gaming machine is a grasping result corresponding to being in a limited range.

  When the stop information is set in a situation where the movable effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means, or when the move effect means is detected by the predetermined detection means immediately after the stop information is set, each movable effect means is set. If it tries to stop, the stop mode in the state where each movable effect means was synchronized may become unpreferable. On the other hand, according to the feature L8, when the stop information is set in such a situation, the stop of each movable effect means is limited, and thus it is easy to stop each movable effect means in a synchronized state. Become.

  Feature L9. When the restriction means is in the restricted state, at least both the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means are after exceeding the restriction range when the stop information is set. Then, the game machine according to the feature L8, wherein the game machine is stopped when detected by the predetermined detection means.

  According to the feature L9, even if it is restricted that each movable effect means is stopped, since it is within the range of one operation, the operation period of each movable effect means does not become longer than necessary. In this way, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

Feature L10. Movable presentation means (disc movable objects 62a, 62b) capable of performing a movable presentation;
Start control means for executing start control of the movable effect means so as to start the operation (function for executing the processes of steps S2704 and S2705 in the sound light side MPU 112);
Stop information setting means (function for executing the process of step S1212 in the sound light side MPU 112) for setting stop information (stop command flag) in a situation where the movable effect means is operating;
After the stop information is set, stop control means (function for executing the processing of steps S3005 and S3010 in the sound light side MPU 112) for stopping the operation of the movable effect means,
With
The stop control means is
An operation position grasping means for grasping an operation position of the movable effecting means (a function for executing the processes of Step S2708, Step S2709, Step S2713, Step S2714, Step S2906 and Step S2907 in the sound light side MPU 112);
When the stop information is set, if the grasping result of the movement position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, a restricting means (sound light) that stops the movable effecting means after being displaced by a predetermined amount The function of executing the process of step S2802 in the side MPU 112),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature L10, when the grasping result of the movement position grasping means is a predetermined grasping result, even if the stop information is set, the movable effect means is stopped after being displaced by a predetermined amount. The As a result, if it is inconvenient to stop the movable effect means, it is possible to avoid the stop of the movable effect means, and it is possible to stop the movable effect means at a preferred timing. From the above, it is possible to suitably perform the execution control using the movable effect means.

  The inventions of the feature K group and the feature L group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a movable object that is driven and operated by a driving device such as a solenoid or a rotary motor are known.

  For example, as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the entrance part provided in the game area, and the display of the display device displays a variation of the pattern. In such a case, a configuration is known in which a combination of specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is entered. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device. In this case, for example, when the movable object is operated in a situation where the display of the variation of the pattern is performed, the transition to the special gaming state occurs with a relatively high probability thereafter. I try to enhance the fun of the game.

  Here, there is a demand for a configuration that can suitably perform execution control using a movable object, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 31 ... Symbol display device, 45 ... Speaker part, 51 ... Curtain plate movable unit, 52 ... Curtain plate movable object, 53a, 53b ... Curtain plate drive unit, 54a, 54b ... Curtain plate rail, 55a , 55b ... slide member, 56a, 56b ... curtain plate drive unit, 57a, 57b ... curtain plate initial position sensor, 58a, 58b ... adjustment position sensor, 61a, 61b ... disk movable unit, 62a, 62b ... disk movable object, 63a, 63b ... disc drive unit, 64a, 64b ... disc rail, 65a, 65b ... shaft guide member, 66a, 66b ... disc slide drive unit, 67a, 67b ... disc rotation drive unit, 68a, 68b ... Slide initial position sensor, 69a, 69b ... rotation initial position sensor, 71-73 ... light emitting unit group, 111 ... sound emission control board, 112 ... sound light side M U, 113 ... sound light side ROM, 114 ... sound light side RAM, 121 ... display control board, 122 ... display side MPU, 123 ... display side ROM, 124 ... display side RAM, 164 ... movable object data area.

Claims (2)

First movable rendering means that operates so as to be in the first motion position at least once with respect to one execution of the motion times;
Second movable rendering means that operates to be in the second operation position at least once for one execution of the operation times;
First detecting means for detecting that the operating position of the first movable effect means becomes the first operating position;
Second detection means for detecting that the operation position of the second movable effect means is the second operation position;
First start control means for starting a first effect state in which the operation of the first movable effect means is performed and the operation of the second movable effect means is not performed ;
Second start control means for starting a second effect state in which an operation is performed in both the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means;
Stop information setting means for setting stop information;
After the stop information is set in the first effect state, when the first detection means detects that the operation position of the first movable effect means becomes the first operation position, the first moveability First stop control means for stopping the operation of the effect means ;
After the stop information is set in the second effect state, the first detection means detects that the operation position of the first movable effect means has become the first operation position, and the second move effect means Second stop control means for stopping the operation of the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means when the second detection means detects that the operation position is the second operation position;
With
The second stop control means is configured such that when the stop information is set, the operation position of the first movable effect means is within a first operation range including the first operation position, or the second move effect means. When the movement position is in the second movement range including the second movement position, the movement of both the first movable presentation means and the second movable presentation means is prevented from being stopped, and then the first movable movement means is performed. After the operating position of the rendering means is not in the first operating range but the operating position of the second movable rendering means is not in the second operating range, the operating position of the first movable rendering means is the first motion. When the first detection means detects that the position has been reached, and when the second detection means detects that the operation position of the second movable effect means has become the second operation position, 1st movable Stops the operation of means and the second movable representation section out,
The first stop control means is configured such that when the stop information is set, even if the operation position of the first movable effect means is within the first operation range, the operation position of the first movable effect means is the first position. A gaming machine , wherein when the first detecting means detects that the position is an operating position, the operation of the first movable effect means is stopped . The game machine according to claim 1, wherein a game is played using a game medium.

Images